Home

Cisco Systems SPA9000 IP Phone User Manual

1. 6 22 9 Variation Source Entry The SSC200 being a magnetic compass transmits heading information referenced to the magnetic north pole magnetic heading The SSC200 is capable of transmitting heading information referenced to the earth s geographic North Pole true heading In order to produce true heading Revision 1 4 16a Page 161 DSM250 User s Manual information regarding the magnetic variation at the current location is required Please see the SSC200 User s Manual for more details on the use of magnetic variation by the SSC200 compass By default the SSC200 is capable of receiving variation information on either its NMEA 0183 or NMEA 2000 interfaces This causes the SSC200 to use variation data from either the NMEA 0183 interface or the NMEA 2000 interface Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNe HW SW 49 Maretron SL A0 IA 20 20171 Advanced Configuration Installation Offset Calibration Invert Installation Normal Installation Label Magnetic Deviation Calibration Magnetic Deviation Status Rate of Turn Damping Period 2 0s Rate of Turn Zero Offset Calibration Variation Source LUS URNE Srey scroll scroll Up Down Figure 177 Setting Variation Source to NMEA 0183 or NMEA 20007 factory default Power Enter You should need to alter this setting only if e There are variation sources available on both the NMEA 20007 and NMEA 0183 inter
2. 2 Press lt Accept gt to complete Abort Increase Decrease Accept Figure 170 SSC200 Installation Offset Calibration Screen Use the Increase and Decrease keys to adjust the display value until it matches the known heading to which the boat is pointed Press the Accept key to accept the value when you are satisfied If you do not wish to perform installation offset calibration at this time press the Abort key and the installation offset will not be altered 6 22 3 Inverted Installation Entry Normally the SSC200 is mounted so that the label on the compass is facing up and the NMEA 20007 and NMEA 0183 connectors are facing towards the bow of the vessel A recent version of SSC200 firmware supports mounting the compass upside down for instance to a ceiling or backwards with connectors facing towards the stern of the vessel so that the SSC200 can be mounted to the aft side of a bulkhead If either of these mounting options is used the DSM250 can be used to inform the SSC200 of this fact so that it can adjust heading rate or turn pitch and roll readings to be corrected accordingly Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNF HWe Swe 49 Maretron SL A0 TU HI 20171 Advanced Configuration Installation Offset Calibration Invert Installation CTT Label Magnetic Deviation Calibration Magnetic Deviation Status Rate of Turn Damping Period 2 0s Rate of T
3. Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model sH HW SWz Press any key to restart the target device and continue Scroll Scroll Power Bach Ue Down Figure 70 Fa vorite Settings Transfer Completion Screen Enter 6 8 6 Copy DST100 calibrations from local display DST100 calibration data is not stored in the DST100 device Rather each DSM150 DSM250 needs to apply its own set of calibration parameters to the raw data received This operation allows one DSM250 to copy its calibration table to a second DSM250 DSM250 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNe HWe SW Ti Maretron DSM250 9179 10 13 0 Advanced Configuration Copy alarms settings from local display Copy device selection from local display Copy display settings from local display Copy favorite settings from local display Copy DST 100 calibrations from local display Label Test Remote Device Selection Power Figure 71 DSM150 DSM250 Copy DST100 calibrations from local display 6 8 7 Copy all settings from local display This is the single operation that makes it easy to have multiple DSM150 DSM250 displays on a boat Set one DSM150 DSM250 up so that all its settings are correct and quickly transfer all the alarms device settings and display setting to another DSM150 DSM250 Then go in and update the following information to customize the new device e Display Settings gt Advanced Conf
4. Figure 4 NMEA 2000 Connector Face View 2 4 1 Checking the Connection Once the NMEA 2000 connection to the Maretron DSM250 has been completed observe the display to check to see that information is being properly received One way to verify connectivity is to enter the device selection menu which is described in Section 5 2 3 2 Refer to Section 0 Troubleshooting if no information appears Revision 1 4 16a Page 5 DSM250 User s Manual 3 Operating the DSM250 3 1 Turning the DSM250 On To turn on the DSM250 press the power key the leftmost of the five keys on the keypad The DSM250 will display a warning and ask you to press the Accept key to acknowledge the warning and continue operation of the DSM250 see Figure 5 below cj OLX Maretron DSM250 Maretron DSM250 software Version 1 4 2 Model Version 2 0 Serial Number 1319999 WARNING By pressing Accept you acknowledge that while Maretron products are designed to be accurate and reliable they should be used only as aids to navigation and not a5 a replacement for traditional navigation aids and techniques Accept Figure 5 DSM250 Power Up Screen Alternatively you may power down the DSM250 by pressing and holding the power key see Section 3 2 below for details 3 2 Turning the DSM250 Off To turn the DSM250 off press and hold the power key The DSM250 will display a countdown screen which can be seen in Figure 6 If you cont
5. A eit WM e Installation Description NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Restore Factory Defaults Scroll Down Figure 182 TLA100 Advanced Configuration Screen Power 6 23 1 1 Device Instance This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the unit You usually will not need to modify the default value of O unless you have multiple units on the network Revision 1 4 16a Page 165 DSM250 User s Manual 6 23 1 2 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value 6 23 1 3 NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable The TLA100 Tank Level Adapter transmits the NUEA2000 PGN 127505 which can be turned on or turned off by the DSM250 display Pressing the Enter key with NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable menu item selected causes the DSM250 to display the following screen Figure 183 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HW SWe T3 Maretron TLA 0 Fal Ti i 10 16 4 Advanced Configuration NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Ce On Figure 183 TLA100 NMEA 20007 PGN Enable Disable Screen You can enable or disable the transmission of the Fluid L
6. Whether the Alert is Enabled or Disabled Type The Type of Alert This is a combination of whether the Alert is Local or Global 0 and whether the Alert is an Alarm or a Warning 8 3 2 Description The textual description of the Alert 8 3 5 Scroll up and down using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons until the alert that must be edited is highlighted and press the Enter button The Alert Editor is opened pre populated with the parameters of the chosen Alert See section 8 1 for details of these parameters Page 234 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 8 6 Setting the Vessel Operating Mode The Vessel Operating Mode must be set on each DSM250 This is a potentially risky operation in that Alerts that are Active in the existing mode may be ignored in the new Operating Mode The DSM250 will warn the operator about these Alerts to minimize the risk However if the new vessel status was transmitted to other Alert Sources that are unmanned then the warnings would be lost For this reason the Vessel Operating mode must be changed at each DSM250 or N2Kview and those alerts which would be disabled noted by the user The Vessel Operating Mode is set through the Alert Setup Screen Scroll Down to the required Operating Mode entry press Enter and then use the Scroll Up Scroll Down buttons to select the new Mode Press Enter to complete the operation Alert Setup Add New Alert Delete Alert Edit Alert Operating Mode E
7. setting 6 8 2 Copy alarms settings from local display It is possible to copy the alarm settings from a DSM250 unit to a remotely located DSM150 DSM250 This should be done with care because if more than one Alert Source is monitoring the same parameter then multiple alerts will be generated when the parameter goes out of bounds and each one will need to be independently accepted or cancelled Any alarms existing on the remote DSM150 DSM250 will be deleted below shows this menu item highlighted Page 6 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model Gd HWe Swe Tl Maretron DSM2 0 10178 10 13 0 Advanced Configuration Copy alarms settings from local display opy device selection from local display Copy display settings from local display Copy favorite settings from local display Copy DST100 calibrations from local display Copy all settings from local display Label Test Remote Device Selection Dn scroll scroll Power u Down Figure 66 DSM150 Copy alarms settings from local display After you select this menu item and press Enter the alarm settings from this DSM250 unit will be copied to the selected remote DSM150 DSM250 unit 6 8 3 Copy device selection from local display Since it is normally desirable for all DSM150 DSM250 units on a network to display the same sensors it is possible to copy the device selection settings from a DSM250 unit to a remotely located
8. 1 0 Gallons Tank Levels Calibration Tank Number Tank Type Fuel Operating Mode NMEA2000 Scroll Power Down Figure 194 Configuring the Tank Number 6 23 6 Tank Type The TLA100 can be used in tanks containing any of a number of different types of fluids So that network connected monitoring devices can determine easily what sort of fluid is in the monitored tank the TLA100 must be programmed to indicate the fluid type it is monitoring Figure 195 below shows a screen shot of the tank type being configured First use the Scroll Up or Scroll Down Page 172 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron keys to position the highlighted cursor over Tank Type then press the Enter key to move the highlight to the tank type data itself Now use the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys to change the tank type data to the type desired Finally press the Enter key to confirm the selection and store the value within the TLA100 Available tank types are as follows Fuel Fresh Water Waste Water Live Well Oil Black Water There are also a number of reserved tank types to accommodate possible future undefined tank types Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNe HWe Swe 3 Maretron TLAW Pala Ti 10 16 4 Advanced Configuration Label Aft Fuel Tank Capacity 1 0 Gallons Tank Levels Calibration Tank Number S Tank Type gt PA Operating Mode NMEA2000 Scrol
9. 2 rows this creates four rows of single switches breakers 3 rows this creates three rows of single switches breakers 4 rows this creates four rows of single switches breakers 2 rows 2 columns this creates two rows by two columns of a single switch breaker Figure 249 Below shows a Favorite Screens Setup screen with a single window configured with the 4 rows configuration Favorite Screens Setup Favorite 16 Favorite Mode Auto Manual Format Full Window Auto Change Interval 5 Seconds Window 1 Data Elec Distribution Switch Breaker TH A rows Figure 249 Configuration of Switch Breaker Display Page 208 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron The maximum number of switches breakers you can have on a single screen is 16 the 4 Quarters format with all four windows set to use the 4 rows or 2 rows 2 column switch breaker configurations In order to configure the individual switch breaker controls press the Enter key with the selected type highlighted to display a menu with entries for each switch breaker in the window being configured as shown in below Favorite Screens RI weu LIGHTS Favorite 16 Switch B reaker O deitsch Switch Breaker 1 Switch Breaker 2 switch Breaker 3 Switch Breaker 4 Restore Factory Defaults Figure 250 Selection of an Individual Switch Breaker Figure 251 below shows the configuration menu for each individual switch breaker Favo
10. 59 Figure 49 ALM100 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen 60 Figure 50 DCM100 Configuration Screen cccceccceceeeecneeee cece eese ees eeseeeeeeseeeseeseeeeeeeseeeseeeaeeeseeeas 62 Figure 51 DCM100 Advanced Configuration Gcreen 62 Figure 52 DCM100 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen 63 Figure 53 Current Sensor Zero Offset Calibration Confirmation Screen nnnnnnennennennnnnnnnnnnnnne 64 Figure 54 Current Sensor Zero Offset Calibration Complete Gcreen 64 Figure 55 DCR100 Configuration Screen ccccccccccccsecceeeceeeceeceeeceeecaeeseeeseeeseesseeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeas 68 Figure 56 DCR100 Advanced Configuration Gcreen 68 Figure 57 DCR100 Current Sensor Zero Offset Calibration Gcreen 69 Figure 58 DCR100 Current Sensor Zero Offset Calibration Completion Gcreen 69 Figure 59 DCR100 NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Gcreen 70 Figure 60 DCR100 Channel Configuration Screen DCR Mode 71 Figure 61 DCR100 Channel Configuration Screen ALM Mode 72 Figure 62 DSM200 Remote Configuration Gcreen 73 Figure 63 DSM200 Remote Device Selection Sereen ccccccccccceccceeeceeeaeeseeeceeeceeesaeeaeeseeeseeeaes 73 Figure 64 DSM150 DSM250 Remote Configuration Gcreen 75 Figure 65 DSM150 DSM250 Remote Device Selection Gcreen cece eeeceeeceeseeeaeeeaeeeeeeaes 76 Figure 66 DSM150 Copy alarms settings from local depl y I Figure 67 DSM250 Copy
11. Heat Index Heating System Inside Live Well Main Cabin Outside Refrigeration Sea Transmission Oil User Defined 129 User Defined 144 Wind Chill 4 2 23 Time Local Date displays the current date referenced to the local time offset see Section 5 2 7 12 on page 43 for details on how to set the local time offset UTC Date displays the current date referenced to Universal Time Coordinated Revision 1 4 16a Page 19 DSM250 User s Manual Moon Phase displays the phase of the moon at the current time and position Sunrise displays the local time of sunrise for the current day and position Sunset displays the local time of sunset for the current day and position Local Time displays the current time referenced to the local time offset see Section 5 2 7 12 on page 43 for details on how to set the local time offset UTC Time displays the current time referenced to Universal Time Coordinated also Known as Greenwich Mean Time or GMT Twilight AM displays the time of nautical twilight e the time of day when the sun is 12 degrees below the horizon in the morning for the current day and position Twilight PM displays the time of nautical twilight e the time of day when the sun is 12 degrees below the horizon in the evening for the current day and position 4 2 24 Transmission The DSM250 supports the display of information for up to four transmissions Gear displays the current gear of
12. NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Scroll Up Figure 89 FF M100 Advanced Configuration 6 12 1 1 Device Instance This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the unit You usually will not need to modify the default value of 0 unless you have multiple units on the network 6 12 1 2 Channel 0 Installation Leave this entry at the default value of Normal Installation if the flow sensor connected to Channel 0 of the FFM100 is installed such that the direction of the fuel flow is in the same direction as the arrow Page 96 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron on the fuel flow sensor label Change this entry to Reverse Installation if the direction of the fuel flow is in the opposite direction as the arrow on the fuel flow sensor label 6 12 1 3 Channel 1 Installation Leave this entry at the default value of Normal Installation if the flow sensor connected to Channel 1 of the FFM100 is installed such that the direction of the fuel flow is in the same direction as the arrow on the fuel flow sensor label Change this entry to Reverse Installation if the direction of the fuel flow is in the opposite direction as the arrow on the fuel flow sensor label 6 12 1 4 Channel 0 Allow negative flow Leave this entry at the default value of Yes for the FFM100 to output negative fuel flow values if the direction of fuel flow for the Channel 0 sensor is opposite the direction of the arrow on the fuel flow se
13. Note the DSM250 is limited to working with annunciators with data instance numbers in the range 0 15 A Remote Annunciator s Instance Tone Enable ti Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Figure 271 Remote Annunciator Enable Disable To enable a specific Annunciator use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons to position the cursor and then press the Enter button to move to the Tone column The options here are e Enable e Disable The desired option is selected using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons and then pressing the Enter button again The tone of the Annunciator will be the same as that set in 8 3 9 8 3 11 Operating Mode Moored see section 4 3 4 for a description of Operating Modes For this Alert to be triggered when the vessel is in the Moored state this option must be set to Enabled The options here are e Enable e Disable The desired option is selected using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons and then pressing the Enter button again 8 3 12 Operating Mode Underway see section 4 3 4 for a description of Operating Modes For this Alert to be triggered when the vessel is in the Underway state this option must be set to Enabled The options here are Revision 1 4 16a Page 231 DSM250 User s Manual e Enable e Disable The desired option is selected using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons and then pressing the Enter button again 8 3
14. Re trigger Period When you accept an alert it will change to the Accepted state and annunciators that are sounding for that alert will stop sounding If the condition which caused the alert remains true after the amount of time in this field the alert will return to the Active state and annunciators will begin sounding again for that alert If a value of 0 00 is entered then the alert will never re trigger Alert Set Point The Alert will be triggered when the qaulity of the GPS fix as reported by the GPS drops lower than the value specified in this field Possible Values are e 3D DGPS best quality 3D GPS 2D GPS 1D GPS No fix Revision 1 4 16a Page 227 DSM250 User s Manual Alert Set Delay When the quality of the GPS fix becomes lower than the quality specified in the Alert Set Point field for longer than the time specified in the Alert Set Delay field the alert will become active Alert Clear Point The Alert will be cleared when the quality of the GPS fix as reported by the GPS becomes better than the value specified in this field Possible values are the same as the Alert Set Point Alert Clear Delay If the alert is active and the quality of the GPS fix becomes higher than the quality specified in the Alert Clear Point field for longer than the time specified in the Clear Delay field the alert will become inactive 8 3 7 11 Trigger Type is Direction Alert A Direction Alert is used to in
15. The PGN will not be transmitted e On The PGN will be transmitted at its default NUEA2000 rate e 0 5s 5s The PGN will be transmitted at the interval specified Select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 3 1 11 Restore Factory Defaults This option restores all settings on the ACM100 device to their factory default state 6 3 2 AC Circuit Type You must configure the ACM100 as to what type of AC circuit connection it is monitoring The allowable values for this parameter are as follows e Single Phase Phase A use this value when power is connected via a single hot wire and a single neutral wire a typical 110VAC connection in the US or 220VAC connection in Europe e Single Phase Phase A B use this value when power is connected via two hot wires 180 out of phase with each other and single neutral wire from a single phase of a transformer a typical 220VAC connection in the US e 3 Phase Y Phase A B C use this value when power is connected via the three hot wires 120 out of phase with each other and single neutral wire from a three phase Y connected circuit 6 3 3 AC Device Type You must configure the ACM100 as to what type of AC source it is monitoring The allowable values for this parameter are as follows e Generator default use this value when you are monitoring the output of an onboard generator e Utility use this value when yo
16. The desired option is selected using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons 8 3 4 2 Data The Data corresponds to the Data Type of data The desired option is selected using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons 8 3 4 3 Instance The Instance corresponds to the instance of the data type on the bus The desired option is selected using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons 8 3 5 Description This is a textual field that will be displayed on the DSM250 and transmitted to Alert Slave devices It is intended to describe the alert e g Fire 8 3 6 Location This is a textual field that will be displayed on the DSM250 and transmitted to Alert Slave devices It is intended to describe the location at which the problem was detected e g Main Stateroom 8 3 Trigger Configuration This set of fields is used to describe the condition under which the alert will be triggered The sub fields will vary depending on the Trigger Type which in turn is determined by the Trigger Source 8 3 1 Trigger Type is High Alert A high alert is used to signal you when a parameter value rises above a threshold you determine For example you can set an alert to occur whenever the freezer temperature rises above 0 C 8 3 7 1 1 Description A high alert and associated diagram are shown in the figure below Page 216 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron High Alert Parameters High Aert transitions to the Auen state after Set Deloy seconds Set Point High
17. ccccceccseccsecceeeceeeceeeseeeaeeeeeeceeeceeeseeeseeeseeeaess 235 Fig r 279 Advanced G OnnOUiRall OM cs 2sicecarestea teen steesaest acabeatcasneentsasnlsess sateen sacevetdeasave qeqsaeesecees 236 Figure 2 79 Restore Factory Defaults Confirmation n nnannannnnnnnnnnennnrnnrnrnnnnsnrnnrnnrsrrnrrrrrnrrnrnnrnne 23 Figure 280 Surface Mounting Template cess eeseeeseeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseesseeseeesaess 246 Figure 281 Flush Mounting Template ccccccccccccecceeceeeceeee eee eeseeceeeeeeseeeeeeseesaeeeesseeseeeseeseesaees 24 Revision 1 4 16a Page xv Maretron 1 General 1 1 Introduction Congratulations on your purchase of the Maretron DSM250 NMEA 2000 Multi function Color Graphic Display Maretron has designed and built your display to the highest standards for years of dependable and accurate service Maretron s DSM250 is a high resolution color display that allows easy interpretation of NMEA 2000 instrument and navigation data through custom display configurations with an easy to use five key illuminated keypad The Maretron DSM250 is designed to operate within the harsh demands of the marine environment However no piece of marine electronic equipment can function properly unless installed configured and maintained in the correct manner Please read carefully and follow these instructions for installation configuration and usage of the Maretron DSM250 in order to ensure optimal performance 1 2
18. you will need to configure this parameter Revision 1 4 16a Page 131 DSM250 User s Manual 6 17 Maretron J2K100 Configuration This describes the configuration of the Maretron J2K100 firmware version 1 0 7 The DSM250 is capable of configuring settings for the J1939 to NMEA 2000 Gateway J2K100 A screenshot of the J2K100 configuration menu is shown in Figure 132 below Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HW SW AS Maretron JK UU 1240008 10 10 11 Device Label NMEAZ000 Instance Engine d Transmission ACiice maker 0 J1939 Source Address Refresh J1939 source address list JHW SA None Figure 132 J2K100 Configuration Screen 6 17 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HW SWE AS Maretron JK 1240008 10 10 11 Advanced Configuration Data Damping Fuel Rate HIE Tachometer 0 05 Device Instance 0 Installation Description J1939 Diagnostic Messages NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Restore Factory Defaults Figure 133 J2K100 Advanced Configuration Screen 6 17 1 1 Data Damping In order to smooth the results viewed on a display you may individually change the data dam
19. Descnption Inactive Local 3 ORT 10 46 49 Local 5 Use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons to select the Alert to be accepted or cancelled and then press the Enter button An Alert Description screen will be displayed with the details of the Alert and the cursor positioned over the Accept Cancel Alert entry Revision 1 4 16a Page 213 DSM250 User s Manual Alert Detail Alert s Pending 4 Time 2009 08 07 11 57 19 Status source Local Type Alarm ID Priority D 02005 Description Motion Location Lobby What s happend Went ACTIVE 26 times Accept Cancel Alert Edit Alert Pressing the Enter button at this point will Accept or Cancel the Alert 8 3 Adding an Alert Alerts are created by selecting the parameter to be monitored e g Depth and then selecting the type of Alert e g High Alert Start by going to the Add New Alert entry in the Alert Setup Menu Alert Setup Delete Alert Edit Alert Operating Mode Underway Advanced Configuration Restore Factory Defaults Figure 254 Adding a New Alert Pressing Enter brings up the Alert Edit Screen Page 214 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron eble Disable Nd Enable Alert Type Alarm Priority Trigger Source Type d Data d Instance Description Location d Trigger ene Trigger Type d Re trigger Period 0 00 min sec Figure 255 Part of the Alert Edit Screen This allows the entry of all the alert p
20. Device Instance 211 GPS Antenna Altitude GPS Elevation Mask GPS PDOP Mask Disable GPS SNR Mask 28 00 dB Installation Description NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Restore Factory Defaults Cancel Increase Decrease Accept Figure 113 Configuring Antenna Altitude on a GPS100 Revision 1 4 16a Page 117 DSM250 User s Manual The allowable values for the Antenna Altitude are between 100m and 100m This number represents the altitude or the GPS100 and is used to improve the quality of the position fix if only a two dimensional fix is obtainable If a three dimensional position fix is obtainable this value is not used 6 14 1 3 Elevation Mask The DSM250 is capable of setting the Elevation Mask on a Maretron GPS100 You can choose this setting by pressing the Enter key with the Elevation Mask menu item selected which causes the screen shown in Figure 114 to be displayed Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNe HWe SW 21 Maretron bam 211 21 20 1 Advanced Configuration Device Instance 211 GPS Antenna Altitude 0 00 m GPS Elevation Mask GPS PDOP Mask Disable GPS SNR Mask 28 00 dB Installation Description NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Restore Factory Defaults Cancel Increase Decrease Accept Figure 114 Configuring Satellite Elevation Mask on a GPS100 The allowable values for Elevation Mask are between 90 and 90 This number represents the elevati
21. Figure 173 SSC200 Magnetic Deviation Calibration Progress Screen This progress screen shows the number of circles completed the current heading the current rate of turn and the current status of compass calibration If you do not wish to continue magnetic deviation calibration at this time press Abort and the currently stored deviation tables will be retained Once calibration is successful a completion screen will appear If calibration is unsuccessful a screen will appear indicating this and you should repeat the calibration procedure 6 22 6 Magnetic Deviation Status Pressing the Enter key with the Magnetic Variation Status menu item selected causes the screen shown in Figure 174 to be displayed Magnetic Deviation Status Eet Magnetic Field Strength Honzontal T uT Vertical uT Total Alul Est Hand Iron Distortion Amplitude 99 uT Direction Est Sott lron Distortion RMS L 1F Figure 174 SSC200 Magnetic Deviation Status Screen 6 22 7 Rate of Turn Damping Period The SSC200 is capable of transmitting the rate of turn of a vessel Different applications may require different damping for the rate of turn measurement The DSM250 may be used to set the damping period for the rate of turn measurement to anywhere between 0 1 seconds and 60 seconds Figure 175 shows an example of the damping period set to 2 seconds Page 160 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Con
22. You can set the correction offset to zero by pressing the Enter key with the Clear Speed Calibration menu item selected And then choose Clear using Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key This changes the correction factor back to 0 such that all subsequent measured sea temperature readings are no longer adjusted before begin transmitted over the NMEA 2000 network Page 88 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 6 10 5 Temperature Calibration The temperature calibration screen shown below indicates the sea temperature as measured by the DST110 which can be changed to the actual sea temperature by following these steps Use the Increase and Decrease keys to adjust the display value until it matches the known sea temperature Press the Accept key to accept the value when you are satisfied If you do not wish to perform temperature calibration at this time press the Abort key and the temperature calibration will not be altered Water Temperature Calibration 1 Select Water Temperature 03 4 TE 2 Press lt Accept gt to complete Power Abort Increase Decrease Accept Figure 84 DST110 Water Temperature Calibration Screen 6 10 6 Transducer Depth Offset The DSM250 can set the transducer depth offset parameter in a DST110 depth speed temperature transducer If you are interested in the actual water depth as opposed to the depth beneath the keel then you should progr
23. 10 5 TEMPE E dee e EE 89 6 10 6 Transducer Depth OMS E 89 OO WUD D e WE 90 6 11 Maretron lee 91 6 11 14 Engine gis seo setene erre eeN GEREDEN E EE REEE EErEE EEEE EEr ERE 91 6 11 2 Boost El ER 91 6 11 3 Boost Pressure Sender Tvpe 92 6 11 4 Boost Pressure Sender Offset 92 6 11 5 Drive Trim Gauge TYPe ccccccceecceecceeeceeeseeeeeeseeeseeceeseueceeeceeesaeeseeseueseeeseeeseeesaeeaes 92 6 7126 Drive Tim Sendel VOC serrera niaan EEs EA SASEA NASEER ESENES ESA NES ESSEER 92 6 11 7 Drive THM Sender OMSECE E 93 Beer OME FESSURG e ECKE 93 6 11 9 OilPress re Sender WV EE 93 6 11 100il Pressure Sender Ottset 93 Revision 1 4 16a Page v DSM250 User s Manual 6 11 11Water Temperature Gauge Ivpe eee eeeeeseeeseeeseeeaeeseeeeeeeseeseeeaes 94 6 11 12Water Temperature Sender Tvpe pinne na enia EA AA e 94 6 11 13Water Temperature Sender Offset 94 6 11 TA ESET ENOINS FOUTS EE 94 6 11 15 Tachometer Flywheel Tee 95 6 12 Maretron FFM100 Configuration cccccccccccseeceeeceeeceeeeeeceeeseeeceeecaeeseeeueseueseeeseeeseeeaas 96 6 12 1 Advanced COMMNGUPalION EE 96 6012 2 DEVICE Lael rte a E ad taaalaailaaadasidaasdaas auulestteeiasttulentt 98 SEN Ke Edel Le 98 0 12 A CMANME EE 98 0122 Chane EE 103 6 13 Maretron FPM100 Configuration cccccccccccceceseeeeeeceeeceeeseeeseeeeeseeeseeeseeseeeseeeaeeeaess 107 6 15 Wee e Bee n BEE 107 E EE EE Ee 109 6 14 Maretron GPS100 Configuration sssi saae Aa AS
24. 2000 bus While in demo mode the DSM250 will display a Demo indicator in the upper right hand corner of the screen Programming this option to On Show Room Mode or On Boat Show Mode No Auto Reset will cause the DSM250 to enter the demo mode while programming this option for Off Normal Use Mode will cause the DSM250 to return to using data from the NMEA 2000 bus In order to be able to demonstrate all of the DSM250 s capabilities the unit allows the user to setup and configure different screens while in demo mode However in a show room environment and five minutes after the last button push e the customer has walked away the demo unit the DSM250 will reset itself to the default screens There are others times where it is important that the DSM250 doesn t automatically reset after five minutes to the default screens for example at a boat show where it is desired to show specific screens while running in the demo mode and thus the Boat Show Mode WARNING All data displayed in demo mode is simulated Do not use this data for vessel monitoring or navigation purposes Display Settings Advanced Configuration Advanced Information Backlight Color Setup Demo Mode Off Normal Use Mode Keypad Beep IW Label Language English Software Version 1 4 8b5 Figure 21 Setting the Demo Mode 5 2 4 6 Keyboard Beep The DSM250 has an annunciator that can be programmed to beep every
25. 4 1 Trigger Configuration Revision 1 4 16a Page 221 DSM250 User s Manual Alert Detail Instance 0 PIH DC CKTS Channel 1 Lobby Description Location Trigger Configuration Trigger Type dOn Alert Re trigger Period 11 00 min sec Alert Set Delay 0 01 min sec Alert Clear Delay 0 02 min sec Local Audible Enable Tone Continuous Remote Annunciator s Figure 261 Trigger Configuration On Alert Re trigger Period When you accept an alert it will change to the Accepted state and annunciators that are sounding for that alert will stop sounding If the condition which caused the alert remains true after the amount of time in this field the alert will return to the Active state and annunciators will begin sounding again for that alert If a value of 0 00 is entered then the alert will never re trigger Alert Set Delay The condition for the parameter being monitored must be in its error condition for at least the set delay time before the alert will become active An interesting use of the set delay when monitoring a bilge pump for example is to set the Set Delay to a large value say 20 minutes Now if the bilge pump runs for more than 20 minutes at a time the alert will be triggered Alert Clear Delay The condition for the parameter being monitored must be not in its error condition for at least the clear delay time before the alert will become cleared 8 3 7 5 Trigger Type
26. B AC Reactive Power 5023 Gen Phase B AC Power 5020 Gen Phase C AC Power 6 l 6 65025 Gen Phase A AC Reactive Power 6 i 6 b 6 l 5024 Gen Phase B AC Basic Quantities 65282 Number of Channels Maretron 65284 DC Breaker Current Maretron 0 0 065286 _ Fluid Flow Rate Maretron 065287 Trip Volume Maretron 126992 System Time 127501 Binary Switch Bank Status 127513 Batter Configuration Status Page 242 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron B 130310 Environmental Parameters 130311 Environmental Parameters 130306 Wind Data A Dometic Icemaker Status Maretron 130833 Vessel Data Recorder Status Maretron 130824 Annunciator Maretron Electrical Operating Voltage 9 to 16 Volts DC Voltage ower Consumption Maximum lt 650mA Low Supply Full Brightness Po 200MA Nominal Supply Low Brightness oad Equivalence Number LEN Reverse Battery Protection es Todefntek Mechanical Parameter Value Comment Size 16 875 x 5 75 x 1 75 Including Flanges for Mounting Weight OOO Mount Revision 1 4 16a Page 243 DSM250 User s Manual Environmental IEC 60954 Classification n S S Vibration __ 2 13 2Hz 1mm 13 2 100Hz 7m s2 per IEC 60945 8 7 Rain and Spray 12 5mm Nozzle 100liters min from 3m for 30min per IEC 60945 8 8 Solar Radiation Ultraviolet B A Visible and Infrared per IEC 60945 8 10 Corrosion Salt Mist 4 times 7days 40 C 95 RH after 2 hour
27. Charge Time Remaining etc Current displays electrical current being sourced to from the battery Voltage displays voltage measured at the battery Battery Temperature displays battery case temperature Battery State of Charge displays estimated state of charge of the battery please consult the battery monitor s documentation for details Battery Time Remaining displays estimated time remaining for the battery given its current temperature and rate of discharge please consult the battery monitor s documentation for details Ripple Voltage displays magnitude of the AC component riding on top of the DC voltage Power displays the power produced or consumed by the battery 4 2 6 Depth Transducer Offset when negative it displays distance from the depth transducer to the bottom of the keel when positive it displays distance between the depth transducer and the waterline Water Depth displays the current water depth including the transducer offset If the transducer offset is programmed to a negative number then the water depth represents the depth below the keel If the transducer offset is positive then the water depth represents water line depth Water Below Transducer displays the distance from the depth transducer to the sea or lake bottom the transducer offset is not taken into account 4 2 7 Elec Distribution The DSM250 supports control of the DCR100 Carling OctoPlex AC and DC Boxes and other
28. Figure 18 below Display Settings Backlight NTH 33 Medium 66 High 100 Power Figure 18 Backlight Menu 5 2 4 4 Color Setup The DSM250 has eight user programmable color palettes The default color palettes are as follows Color Set 1 White Back Ground Black Foreground Color Set 2 Red Back Ground Black Foreground Color Set 3 Blue Back Ground Black Foreground Color Set 4 Green Back Ground Black Foreground Color Set 5 Black Background White Foreground Color Set 6 Black Background Red Foreground Color Set 7 Black Background Blue Foreground Color Set 8 Black Background Green Foreground Choosing the Color Setup menu item from the main Display Settings menu takes you to the screen shown in Figure 19 Page 32 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Display Settings Color Setup Color Set 1 Color Set 2 Color Set ei Color Set 4 Color Set ei Color Set et Color Set 7 Color Set ep Power Figure 19 Color Palette Selection Screen Use the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys to move the highlight to the color set that you want to change and then press the Enter key Selecting Color Set 1 takes you to the screen shown in Figure 20 Display Settings Color Setup Color Set 1 CE On Inverse Background Off E cae e Tank Fuel 0 Level Blue 100 Figure 20 Color Palette Configuration
29. Figure 222 WS0100 Advanced Configuration Gcreen 191 Figure 223 WSO100 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen 192 Figure 224 WS0100 Device Label Menu 193 Figure 225 WSO100 Installation Offset Screen ccc ccecccecceeeceeeceeece cece eeeeceeeceeeceeseeeaeeeaeesaues 193 Figure 226 WSO100 Configuration Aborted Due to Low Wind Gpoeed 194 Figure 227 Installation Offset Success Confirmation Gcreen 194 Figure 228 Installation Offset Abort Confirmation Screen ccccccccecceecceeeceeeseeeaeeeeeeseeeseeeaeeeaues 195 Figure 229 Setting the Wind Data Damping Period cece eceeeceeeseeeseeeaeeeaeesaees 195 Figure 230 Setting the Barometric Pressure annannennnnnnnnnnonnonrnnrnrrnrrrrrrrrnrrnrnnrnnrnrrrrrnrrnrrnrnnenne 196 Figure 231 Setting the Outside HUMICILY ec ccceccseeceseceeeceeecaeecesesecaeeseeecaeesseseueseeeseeenaes 196 Figure 232 Setting the Outside Temperature 197 Figure 233 ANCNOF Watten DIS pay lune 198 Figure 234 Compass Rose Display Course Up Example nannannnnnnnnennennnnnnnnnnnnrsrrnrrnrenrrnrnnrnne 199 Figure 235 Compass Rose North Up Display 199 Figure 2306 Gauge DIS play E E 200 Figure 237 Rudder Angle Gauge Display Exvample 200 Figure 238 GPS Status Display Exvample REENEN 201 Page xiv Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Figure 239 Numeric Display Exvample ccsssreircisrdrssetipisers t pensr En e ors deon Erdh O ipd ie ror r
30. Firmware Revision This manual corresponds to DSM250 firmware revision 1 4 16 1 3 DSM250 Features The Maretron DSM250 has the following features e NMEA 20007 Interface Waterproof NMEA 2000 Connector Sealed Waterproof Enclosure Powered Directly from NMEA 2000 Port Surface Flush or Gimbal Mounting Adjustable Multi colored Backlighting of Screen and Keys Preserves Night Vision Visual and Audible Alarms 16 User Configurable Favorite Screens Automatic or Manual Scrolling between Screens Capable of Viewing Virtually all NMEA 20007 Information including Batteries Engines Generators Shore Power Tanks Navigation Weather and More 1 4 Quick Install Installing the Maretron DSM250 display involves the following four steps Please refer to the individual sections for additional details e Unpack the Box Section 2 1 e Choose a Mounting Location Section 2 2 e Mount the DSM250 Section 2 3 e Connect the DSM250 Section 2 4 Revision 1 4 16a Page 1 DSM250 User s Manual 2 Installation 2 1 Unpacking the Box When unpacking the box containing the Maretron DSM250 you should find the following items e 1 DSM250 NMEA 2000 Multi function Graphic Display 4 Mounting studs 4 Mounting washers 4 Mounting lock washers 4 Mounting knurled nuts 1 DSM250 User s Manual e 1 Warranty Registration Card If any of these items are missing or damaged please contact Maretron 2 2 Choosing a Mounting Locatio
31. Manual 8 3 7 8 1 Trigger Configuration Alert Detail Trigger Configuration Trigger Type minside Radius Alert Re trigger Period 5 00 min sec Alert Set Point 3 00 Nautical Miles Alert Set Delay 0 06 min sec Alert Clear Point 3 50 Nautical Miles Alert Clear Delay 0 06 min sec Latitude 33 34 080 N Longitude 112 06 530 W Get Current Position Local Audible Enable Tone Continuous Figure 266 Trigger Configuration Inside Radius Alert Re trigger Period When you accept an alert it will change to the Accepted state and annunciators that are sounding for that alert will stop sounding If the condition which caused the alert remains true after the amount of time in this field the alert will return to the Active state and annunciators will begin sounding again for that alert Alert Set Point If the distance between the current GPS position and the reference position falls below above the value in this field the alert will become active Alert Set Delay The distance between the current GPS position and the reference position must fall below the Inside Radius Alert Set value for longer than the time in this field in order for an alert to become active Alert Clear Point If the alert is active and the distance between the current GPS position and the reference position rises above the value in this field the alert will become inactive Alert Clear Delay The distance between the curren
32. Menu Selecting Alert Setup from the Main Menu allows you to create delete and edit the Alerts stored in the DSM250 and to change the operating mode of the vessel See section 7 14 for details on the Alerts 5 2 2 Alert Status Selecting Alert Status from the Main Menu will display a list of currently active Alerts in the DSM250 See section 8 1 1 for details on the Alert Status Screen 5 2 3 Configuration Menu The configuration menu allows you to change the configuration of certain types of Maretron NMEA 2000 devices as well as to select from which NMEA 2000 nodes data may be received The available options within the Configuration screen are shown in Figure 11 Power Scroll Scroll Up Down Figure 11 Configuration Screen 5 2 3 1 Device Configuration The ability to calibrate and configure other devices on the bus is a major portion of this manual For this reason it has been given an entire section See section 6 for details 5 2 3 2 Device Selection The Device Selection menu allows you to enable and disable the display of data from individual NMEA 2000 devices In this manner multiple devices of the same type may be used in redundant and fail safe configurations A typical Device Selection menu for a network configuration can be seen in Figure 12 below NOTE Now that you can select instances for each displayed parameter you do not need to configure this menu This menu entry is retained for
33. Offset Calibration Screen 2 0 0 cece cccceeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseesaees 158 Figure 171 Setting the Installation Orientation c ccc cceccsecceecceeeceeeceeceeeceeeceeeceeeseeseeeseeeseeesaees 158 Figure 172 SSC200 Magnetic Deviation Calibration Start Screen cece ececeecceeeeeeeaeeeaeeeeees 159 Figure 173 SSC200 Magnetic Deviation Calibration Progress Screen snnsnnsnnennernrennennrnnnnn 160 Figure 174 SSC200 Magnetic Deviation Status Gcreen cc cccccceecceeeceeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeeaeeens 160 Figure 175 Programming SSC200 Rate of Turn Damping Henod 161 Figure 1 6 SSC200 Rate of Turn Zero Offset Calibration Screen cccccccceccceceeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeeees 161 Figure 177 Setting Variation Source to NMEA 0183 or NMEA 2000 factory default 162 Figure 178 Setting Variation Source to NMEA 0183 On ccc cecceecceeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeseeeaeeeaues 162 Figure 179 Setting Variation Source to NMEA 2000 Only 163 Figure 180 Entering Manual Varaton 163 Figure 181 TLA100 Configuration Gcreen 165 Figure 182 TLA100 Advanced Configuration Gcreen 165 Figure 183 TLA100 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen 166 Figure 184 Configuring the Tank Capacby cece eeseeseeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseesseesaeeseeaaees 167 Figure 185 Tank Capacity Change Confirmation Gcreen 167 Figure 186 Performing Custom Calibration of the Tank Level Adapnter 168 Figure 187 T
34. Origin to Destination HDG Heading Figure 241 below shows a rolling road display The navigation parameters that have been selected are COG SOG ETA and TTG On the navigation highway itself the waypoint name if available is displayed on the upper left and the waypoint number if available is displayed on the upper right The dashed vertical line along the center of the highway represents the current leg of the route The distance of the boat to the left or the right of the line represents the XTE Cross Track Error The angle of the boat relative to the vertical line represents the difference between the boats COG Course Over Ground and the BTW Bearing to Waypoint The scale of the XTE display can be Revision 1 4 16a Page 203 DSM250 User s Manual selected by setting a value for the XTE alarm See Section 5 2 1 Alert Setup Menu on page 27 for details Figure 241 Rolling Road Display 7 7 Line Graph The line graph display shows the value of a parameter displayed on the horizontal axis versus time on the vertical axis Figure 242 below shows the line graph display for barometric pressure over a time period of one day The line graph display can show the selected data over a time period of 1 2 3 4 5 6 or 7 days Line graph displays are supported only for barometric pressure Barometric 24h 18h 12h Gh Inches Mercu Figure 242 Line Graph Display 7 8 Weather Display The DSM250 su
35. Salt Spray Per IEC 60945 8 12 ion Electromagnetic Emission Conducted and Radiated Emission per IEC60945 9 Electromagnetic Immunity Conducted Radiated Supply and ESD per IEC 60945 10 Safety Precautions Dangerous Voltage Electromagnetic Radio Frequency per IEC 60945 12 Page 244 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 12 Technical Support If you require technical support for Maretron products you can reach us in any of the following ways Telephone 1 866 550 9100 Fax 1 602 861 1777 E mail support maretron com World Wide Web hittp www maretron com Mail Maretron LLP Attn Technical Support 9014 N 23 Ave Suite 10 Phoenix AZ 85021 USA Revision 1 4 16a Page 245 DSM250 User s Manual 13 Installation Template Please check the dimensions before using the following diagram as a template for drilling the mounting holes because the printing process may have distorted the template 3 16 Diameter 3 16 Diameter 1 3972 Holes Holes Cut 2 25 diameter Cut the surface out along the dotted line Drill Drill Es 3 16 Diameter 3 16 Diameter Ki Holes _ Holes 2 379 2 375 Surface Mounting Template Figure 280 Surface Mounting Template Page 246 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 5 47 139mm Gd SC dene mmh z e eg ge z a Bumm mm ee te 6 54 166mm Figure 281 Flush Mounting Template Revision 1 4 16a Page 247 DSM250 User s Manual 14 Maretron 2 Year Lim
36. Screen You can enable or disable Color Set 1 by changing the Color Ger to Off This will disable Color Set 1 while changing between color palettes when using a long press of the Lights key when the DSM250 is operating in favorite screens mode Change the Color Get back to On to enable this color palette Notice that Color Set 1 has a white background 100 Red 100 Green and 100 Blue equals white and that the foreground color is black You can adjust the three different colors to achieve different color backgrounds Use the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys to move the highlight to the color you want to change and then press the Enter key Use the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys with the percentage number selected to change that particular color s intensity You can also switch the background color to the foreground color by changing the Inverse Background to Revision 1 4 16a Page 33 DSM250 User s Manual On The background will switch to black and the percentage color settings are now used to define the foreground color 5 2 4 5 Demo Mode The DSM250 has a demo mode suited for displaying the capabilities of the unit It causes the DSM250 to operate in a simulated data mode where the DSM250 will install a set of pre defined favorite screens and other configuration and will then display only the internally generated simulated data and will ignore any data arriving over the NMEA
37. Tank Levels Calibration Tank Number S Tank Type Fuel Operating Mode NMEA2000 amp Analog Gauge Gauge Resistance to sender 25 Gauge Resistance to sender 364 Cancel Increase Decrease Accept Figure 184 Configuring the Tank Capacity After you have pressed the Enter key a confirmation screen will appear that warns you that the fluid remaining measurement will change as a result of this change Press the Accept key to accept the change and store the new tank capacity value within the TLA100 or Press the Cancel Key gt to cancel the change and leave the old tank capacity programmed into the TLA100 Configuration Device Configuration Na Manufacturer Model SH n a Changing tank capacity will affect Ta tank level readings Are you sure Figure 185 Tank Capacity Change Confirmation Screen 6 23 4 Tank Levels Calibration In order for the TLA100 to indicate an accurate tank level it must know how the resistance of the resistive tank level sender corresponds to the level of fluid in the tank There are three methods of calibrating the tank level sender Revision 1 4 16a Page 167 DSM250 User s Manual e Custom Calibration use for non rectangular tanks or non standard sensors also most accurate in any case but requires more effort e Set to American Standard 240 33 ohm use for rectangular tanks using a tank level sender with the standard American resistance range 240 ohms at
38. These engines will have separate supply and return fuel lines Two Independent Sensors the FFM100 can measure flow rates from two independent sources for example a water flow rate on one channel and a gasoline fuel flow rate on another channel 6 12 4 Channel 0 This submenu contains configuration parameters for Channel 0 This menu looks different depending on whether the FFM100 s operating mode has been set to Differential or Two Independent Sensors Page 98 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 6 12 4 1 Channel 0 Differential Mode This section describes the Channel 0 configuration parameters when the FFM100 s operating mode has been set to Differential The Channel 0 Differential Mode menu is too large to fit on a single screen so it is shown in two separate screenshots below Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HWt SM 69 Maretron FFH 0 1679999 10 1121 Channel ei RSR Supply Engine Instance 0 Engine Label PORT ENGINE K Factor 1001 Data Damping Period 3 05 Reset Total Volume Recorded Temperature Instance 0 Temperature Source User Defined 129 Figure 91 FFM100 Channel 0 First Configuration Screen Differential Mode Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HWt SVY 69 Maretron FFH 400 DIER 10 1121 Channel ei Reset Total Volume Recorded Temperature Instance 0 Temperature Source User Defined 129 Temperature Label
39. This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the unit You usually will not need to modify the default value of 0 unless you have multiple units on the network Page 86 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 6 10 1 2 Instance Temperature The Data Instance of the Temperature as sent in PGNs 130310 130311 and 130312 is set in this field Use the Increase and Decrease buttons to select the correct instance number and the press the Enter button to store it 6 10 1 3 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value 6 10 1 4 NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable The DST110 transmits several different NUEA2000 PGN s which can be turned on or turned off by the DSM250 display Pressing the Enter key with NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable menu item selected causes the DSM250 to display the following screen Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SHY HW SWe Zi Maretron DST 10 D235 511003 10 Advanced Configuration NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable KREE 0 Ee Ant Water Depth On THI Environmental Parameters On 130311 Environ mental Parameters Ott ToT Temperatur
40. an editable value indicated by a colon followed by the data value moves the selection to the editable value and changes the keys to edit mode 3 3 2 Choosing a Value from a List When editing a value chosen from a list the keys on the DSM250 keypad have the following functions Power Key turns the DSM250 off see Section 3 1 on page 6 for details Back Key aborts the edit and restores the editable value to its previous value Scroll Up Key changes the currently selected editable value from the presently selected one to the one immediately above it in the list of possibilities If the top menu item is already selected the selection wraps to the bottom menu item Scroll Down Key changes the currently selected editable value from the presently selected one to the one immediately below it in the list of possibilities If the bottom menu item is already selected the selection wraps to the top menu item Enter Key Accepts the currently displayed value and stores it 3 3 3 Entering a Numeric Value When editing a numeric value the keys on the DSM250 keypad have the following functions Power Key turns the DSM250 off see Section 3 1 on page 6 for details Cancel Key aborts the edit and restores the editable value to its previous value Increase Key increases the editable value Decrease Key decreases the editable value Accept Key Accepts the currently dis
41. bottom of the screen To update the list after adding a device highlight this entry and press the Enter button 6 18 Maretron NBE100 Configuration The DSM250 is capable of configuring the Maretron NBE100 Network Bus Extender This describes the configuration of the Maretron NBE100 firmware version 1 0 1 0 The NBE100 configuration menu is shown in Figure 140 below Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HW SW BC Maretron NBEWO oui 140 100 Advanced Configuration HAE Forward Bus Extender Figure 140 NBE100 Configuration Screen Revision 1 4 16a Page 137 DSM250 User s Manual 6 18 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HWE SW BC Maretron NBE 0 1240263 10 10 0 Advanced Configuration Device Instance E Installation Description Restore Factory Defaults Figure 141 NBE100 Advanced Configuration Screen 6 18 1 1 Device Instance This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the unit You usually will not need to modify the default value of O unless you have multiple units on the network 6 18 1 2 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 ins
42. can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value 6 3 1 10 NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable The ACM100 Alternating Current transmits a number of the NMEA2000 PGNs which can be turned on or turned off by the DSM250 display For reasons of compatibility with older NUEA2000 devices some of these PGNs are redundant disabling these PGNs will reduce the amount of traffic on the NMEA2000 bus Pressing the Enter key with NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable menu item selected causes the DSM250 to display the following screen Figure 45 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNF HW SW Di Maretron ACM 0 THOM 10 LE Advanced Configuration NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable 600G il Phase C AC Reactive Power il Phase C AC Power il Phase C AC Basic Quantiti il Phase B AC Reactive Power il Phase B AC Power il Phase B AC Basic Quant il Phase A AC Reactive Power Ott Ott Ott Ott Ott Ott Ott Figure 45 ACM100 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen Page 56 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron You can enable or disable the transmission of a PGN message or set the frequency of transmission of the message by pressing the Enter key on the message to be configured Options are e Off
43. device and pressing the Enter key you may then use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys to toggle the Display status for this particular device Once you are satisfied with the state of the Display setting press the Enter key to accept the setting The DSM250 will retain information on devices that have been removed from the bus or powered down Offline so that when they are placed back on the bus they will assume their prior Display setting Page 28 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 5 2 4 Display Settings Menu The display settings menu allows you to change parameters related to display operation Backlight Color Setup Demo Mode Off Normal Use Mode Keypad Beep On Label Language English Software Version 1 3 10 Power Figure 13 DSM250 Display Settings Screen 5 2 4 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Display Settings Advanced Configuration Installation Description 1 Helm Fe Primary Device Selection Refresh Network Information Restore Factory Defaults Figure 14 DSM250 Advanced Configuration 5 2 4 1 1 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text string
44. device selection from local denla y 77 Figure 68 DSM150 DSM250 Copy display settings from local display 78 Figure 69 DSM150 DSM250 Copy favorite settings from local display ccccccseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 78 Figure 70 Favorite Settings Transfer Completion Screen ccccccceccceccceeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeseees 19 Figure 71 DSM150 DSM250 Copy DST100 calibrations from local display 19 Figure 72 DSM150 DSM250 copy all settings from local display ccccccecceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaes 80 Figure 73 DSM150 DSM250 Label Configuration cc cc ccecccecceecceeeceeeeeeceeeceeeseeeseeeseeeeeseeeseeeaes 80 Figure 74 DSM150 DSM250 Remote Device Gelechon ccc ceccccccececeeeeeeeeeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeseeseeeaes 81 FOUG ERC OR ERR CONU AMON ClO iese E E weer A A 82 Figure 76 DST100 Advanced Configuration Screen ccccccccecccececeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeaeesseeseeesaeess 82 Figure 77 Calibrating the DSM250 for DST100 Speed through Water 83 Figure 78 Setting the Transducer Depth Offset in a DGTIiI00 84 Figure 79 Resetting the DST100 Trip Distance og 85 Figure 80 DST110 Configuration Screen ccc ccccccc cece eeeceeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseesseesseeseeeseeeseeeseeees 86 Figure 81 DS1T110 Advanced Configuration Screen aannannanoansnnnnnnnnnrnnrrnronronrnnrnnrnrrnrrrrrnrrnennene 86 Figure 82 DST110 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disa
45. different transmitted messages and pressing the Enter key on the message to be configured Select whether you want the message to be transmitted On or disabled Off using the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 17 1 6 Restore Factory Defaults This option restores all settings on the device to their factory default state 6 17 2 Device Label A label may be assigned to the J2K100 as an aid to identifying the device over the network See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value 6 17 3 NMEA 2000 Instance Engine This entry allows the engine to be mapped to an NMEA2000 instance number Each engine on an NMEA 2000 network must have a unique instance identifier to allow display devices to distinguish it from other engines on the network The NMEA2000 Engine Instance menu item allows you to configure the engine instance identifier which will be sent over the NMEA 2000 network along with engine related NMEA 2000 messages In order to configure this parameters use the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys to move the highlighted cursor to the NMEA2000 Engine Instance menu item Then press the Enter key to move the highlight to the numeric value on the right as shown in Figure 136 below Because only one such mapping can take place each engine on the J1939 network must have its own J2K100 Gateway The J1939 Source Address see section 6 17 4 identifi
46. done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HW SW D3 Maretron SIM 0 HAO 10 111 Advanced Configuration Device Instance far Installation Description NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Restore Factory Defaults Figure 161 SIM100 Advanced Configuration Screen 6 21 1 1 Device Instance This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the unit You usually will not need to modify the default value of O unless you have multiple units on the network Revision 1 4 16a Page 151 DSM250 User s Manual 6 21 1 2 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value 6 21 1 3 NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable The SIM100 Switch Indicator Module transmits the NUEA2000 PGN 127501 which can be turned on or turned off by the DSM250 display Pressing the Enter key with NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable menu item selected causes the DSM250 to display the following screen Figure 162 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model Sg HWE SW D3 Maretron SIM 0 HAO 10 111 Advanc
47. ee ee ee ee ee 166 oe eo ET eru EE 166 0234 Tank Levels E ee e LE 167 See RE a LTE ne 172 eg AIG EE 172 SE EE e ang le Le 173 6 23 8 Gauge Resistance to Gender 174 6 23 9 Gauge Resistance to Gender 174 6 24 Maretron TLM100 Configuration ccccccccccccceceseeeeeeceece cece eeseeeaeeeeeeseeeseeseeeseeeaeesaess 176 SE lh FAO Neod CORNO e EE 176 O24 E e EE 177 A ARIK GAD AGU E 177 6 24 4 Tank Levels Calibration ccccccccccccecccececeeeseeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseetseeseeeseeees 178 O24 9 TANK In e 182 OAO LNE KE 182 6 25 Maretron TLM150 Configuration ccccccccccccceceseeeeeeceeece cece eeseeeseeeeeeceeeseeseeeseeeseeeaess 183 6 26 Maretron TLM200 Configuration cccccccccecccecceeeeeeeeeeeceeeseeeseeeeeeeeuecseeseeseeeseesaeeeaess 183 O27 Maretron TMP100 Configu uratiOrN BEE 184 6 2721 Advanced KR ele ETC e EEN 184 O22 Ela ee le A 185 oA Wl Te E e 186 6 28 Maretron USB100 Configuration c ccc ccccccccececeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseesseeceeeseeeseeeseesanes 187 6028 1 Adv n ed Kelte IR e EE 187 Revision 1 4 16a Page vil DSM250 User s Manual Page vill 6 28 2 Remote Device Gelechon cece cece eeeceeece cece eeseece cece eeseeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeaeeeseeteeeseeess 188 6 29 Maretron VDIKR100 CONnTIGUIFaAlION EE 189 6 29 71 AdV nced COMTI GURU OI EE 189 6 30 Varetron VV SO 100 COnNGUIATIOM serseri EA OEO 190 6 30 1 ele e Ree EI le EE 190 GO 90 2 DEVIC e 19
48. electrical distribution devices that utilize NMEA Command of the 127501 Binary Switch Status message for controlling loads Switch Breaker controls the ON OFF state of a switch or circuit breaker Breaker Current displays current through a switch or circuit breaker 4 2 8 Engine The DSM250 supports the display of information for up to 64 engines Boost Pressure displays the boost pressure of a supercharger or turbocharger Hours displays the number of hours of operation reported by the engine Coolant Pressure displays the engine s coolant pressure Coolant Temp displays the engine s coolant temperature Page 14 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Exhaust Gas Temp displays the temperature of the engine s exhaust gas Fuel Pressure displays the pressure of the fuel for the engine Fuel Rate displays the rate of fuel consumption for the engine Oil Pressure displays the engine s oil pressure Oil Temp displays the engine s oil temperature Tachometer displays the rotational speed of the engine Tilt Trim displays the tilt or trim of the drive Voltage displays the electrical power supply voltage measured at the engine Fuel Economy displays the current fuel economy for the engine Fuel Consumption displays the current fuel consumption for the engine Percent Load displays the current load on the engine as a percentage of rated load Percent Torque displays the current torque from
49. errare aa EE EAEE E 107 Figure 99 FPM100 Advanced Configuration Gcreen 108 Figure 100 FPM100 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen 108 Figure 101 FPM100 Channel 0 First Configuration Screen Tank Mode 109 Figure 102 FPM100 Channel 0 Second Configuration Screen Tank Mode 110 Figure 103 FPM100 Tank Levels Calibration Menu 111 Figure 104 Performing Custom Calibration of the Tank Level Adapter n n0annnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnn 111 Figure 105 Tank Levels Calibration Capacity Estimation cccccccceccseeeeeeeeeeceeeceeeseeseeeseesaees 112 Figure 106 Empty Level CAallOratlon EE 112 Figure 107 Intermediate Level Calibration cccccccceccsecceeeceeecececeesaecaeeceeeceeeseesaesagesseeseeesaees 113 Figure 106 Full LeVel C leie Le EE 113 Figure 109 Custom Tank Level Calibration Confirmation Screen cccccccecceecceeeceeeceeeaeeeaeeeaees 114 Figure 110 Rectangular Tank Calibration cccccccccccccceeceseceeecececeeesseseueceeesaeesaeeseesseeseeeeeesaeees 114 Figure 111 GPS100 Configuration Gcreen 116 Figure 112 GPS100 Advanced Configuration Gcreen 117 Figure 113 Configuring Antenna Altitude on a GG 117 Figure 114 Configuring Satellite Elevation Mask on a GbG m00 eee eeseeeaeeeeees 118 Figure 115 Configuring PDOP Mask on a GPS100 occ cccceecc cece cece eeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeaeesseeeaees 119 Figure 116 Configuring S
50. in this field in order for an alert to become active Alert Clear Point If the alert is active and the distance between the current GPS position and the reference position falls below the value in this field the alert will become inactive Alert Clear Delay The distance between the current GPS position and the reference position must fall below the Outside Radius Alert Clear value for longer than the time in this field in order for an alert to become inactive Latitude The latitude of the reference position This may be typed in as lt degrees gt lt minutes gt followed by an N or S If the N or S is missing North is assumed Moving the cursor to another field will reformat the contents of this field Longitude The longitude of the reference position This may be typed in as lt degrees gt lt minutes gt followed by an E or W If the E or W is missing East is assumed Moving the cursor to another field will reformat the contents of this field Get Current Position Selecting this will transfer the current GPS position into the Latitude and Longitude fields 8 3 7 8 Trigger Type is Inside Radius Alert The Inside Radius Alert is similar to the Outside Radius Alert except that an alert is activated if the vessel comes within a certain distance or radius of a reference point expressed as a longitude and latitude Figure 266 shows an Inside Radius Alert and associated parameters Revision 1 4 16a Page 225 DSM250 User s
51. is Off Alert As opposed to high and low alerts that are associated with analog input signals e many different possible input values there are also switch alerts that are associated with a binary input value sometimes called on or off yes or no enabled or disabled set or reset active or inactive The switch alert is similar to the high and low alert except that there are no set or reset points The mere fact that the switch is seen as Off causes the alert to become an active alert assuming the Set Delay is set to zero Likewise if the switch being monitored is seen as On then the alert becomes inactive assuming the Clear Delay is set to zero If the delays are not programmed to zero then the switch must remain Off for the Set Delay before the alert becomes active and must remain On for the Clear Delay before the alert becomes inactive 8 3 7 5 1 Trigger Configuration Page 222 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Alert Detail Instance ei PIH DC CKTS Channel 1 Lobby Description Location Trigger Configuration Trigger Type Re triqger Period 11 00 min sec Alert Set Delay 0 01 min sec Alert Clear Delay 0 02 min sec Local Audible Enable Tone Continuous Remote Annunciator s Figure 262 Trigger Configuration Data Unavailable Alert Re trigger Period When you accept an alert it will change to the Accepted state and annunciators that are sounding for that alert will stop sounding If the c
52. is active and the parameter value falls below the value in this field the alert will become inactive Alert Clear Delay The parameter being monitored must fall below the Alert Clear Point value for longer than the time in this field in order for the alert to become inactive The value is entered as minutes seconds If only one number is entered it will be interpreted as seconds 8 3 7 2 Trigger Type is Low Alert A low alert is used to signal you when a parameter value falls below a threshold you determine For example you can set an alert to occur whenever the port engine oil pressure rises falls below 40 PSI 8 3 7 2 1 Parameters A low alert and associated diagram are shown in the figure below Page 218 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Low Alert Parameters ME Active tr accepted e Low Alert G Clear Point Low Alert transitions te the amp inactive state after Clear P DE Delay seconds 3 Ga ee Activa state after ae KS Sp WI Geer Point Set Delay hr a belmar Lour Operator Accepts Set Point Alert Time Figure 258 Low Alert Parameters A low alert is triggered i e becomes an active alert once an input signal has dropped below the Low Alert Set Point and the Set Delay time has elapsed If the Set Delay is set to zero then the alert is immediately triggered once the input signal drops below the Low Alert Set Point The Set Delay is used to reduce false or spurious alerts As an example setting the Set Delay to 5 seco
53. oe ths Actes gets hair rmon ti Set Section sany n pep ee makire Cancel Distance radius from Reference Point 5 d Time Figure 264 Outside Alert Parameters Page 224 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 8 3 7 7 2 Trigger Configuration Outside Radius Alert Alert Detail Trigger Configuration Trigger Type mOutside Radius Alert Re triqger Period 5 00 min sec Alert Set Point 3 00 Nautical Miles Alert Set Delay 0 06 min sec Alert Clear Point 2 50 Nautical Miles Alert Clear Delay 0 06 min sec Latitude 33 34 080 N Longitude 112 06 530 W Get Current Position Local Audible Enable Tone Continuous Figure 265 Trigger Configuration Outside Radius Alert Re trigger Period When you accept an alert it will change to the Accepted state and annunciators that are sounding for that alert will stop sounding If the condition which caused the alert remains true after the amount of time in this field the alert will return to the Active state and annunciators will begin sounding again for that alert If a value of 0 00 is entered then the alert will never re trigger Alert Set Point If the distance between the current GPS position and the reference position rises above the value in this field the alert will become active Alert Set Delay The distance between the current GPS position and the reference position must rise above the Outside Radius Alert Set value for longer than the time
54. of all liquid volume related information Units that may be selected are the following e Liters e Imperial Gallons UK Gallons e Gallons US Gallons 5 2 7 11 Time Format This menu item allows you to select whether measurements indicating a time of day are displayed in 12 Hour AM PM format or 24 Hour military format 5 2 7 12 Local Time Offset This menu item allows you to indicate the offset of local time relative to Universal Time Coordinated UTC also known as Greenwich Mean Time or GMT in hours and minutes For instance Eastern Standard Time EST would use an offset value of 5 00 5 2 7 13 Date Format This menu item allows you to select the format of any displayed dates Formats that may be selected are the following MM DD YYYY 01 31 2005 DD MM YYYY 31 01 2005 MMM DD YYYY JAN 31 2005 DD MMM YYYY 31 JAN 2005 Revision 1 4 16a Page 43 DSM250 User s Manual 6 Device Configuration The Device Configuration menu enables you to configure certain types of devices on the NMEA 2000 network Devices that may be configured using the DSM250 include the following Airmar Depth Speed and Temperature Transducers DST800 DT800 P39 P79 B122 ST850 ST800 HT200 Reset trip log set depth offset speed calibration and temperature offset if applicable Bennett EP 30 Calibrate trim tabs Maretron Alternating Current Monitor ACM100 Set circuit type device type instance number and labe
55. or has been disconnected from the bus has lost power or for some other reason is not responding to queries Offline The Disp column indicates whether data from that particular device is accepted for display by the remote DSM200 On or that the remote DSM200 ignores data transmitted by this device Off By scrolling to the device and pressing the Enter key you may then use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys to toggle the Display status for this particular device Once you are satisfied with the state of the Display setting press the Enter key to accept the setting The remote DSM200 will retain information on devices that have been removed from the bus or powered down Offline so that when they are placed back on the bus they will assume their prior Display setting Page 4 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 6 8 Maretron DSM150 DSM250 Configuration You can use the DSM250 to configure other remotely located DSM150 and DSM250 units by using the Remote DSM150 DSM250 configuration menu as shown in below This describes the configuration of the Maretron DSM150 DSM250 firmware version 1 4 16 There are three configurable items for the remote DSM150 DSM250 Remote Device Selection Copy device selection from local display and Copy favorite settings from local display Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model Sit HWe Swe H Maretro
56. reset the total volume recorded to zero 6 12 4 2 7 Temperature Instance Program this parameter to match the desired instance number of the temperature reading for this channel You can program this parameter to any value between 0 and 252 The default value for this parameter is 0 6 12 4 2 8 Temperature Source Program this parameter to match the desired source type of the temperature reading for this channel The default value for this parameter is 129 User Defined 6 12 4 2 9 Temperature Label Program this parameter with a text string which identifies the particular temperature parameter being monitored by this channel Maretron display products will display this label text when you are selecting data to display Page 102 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 6 12 4 2 10 Fluid Type Program this parameter to match the type of fluid whose flow is being monitored 6 12 4 2 11 Flow Instance Program this parameter to match the desired instance number of the fluid flow reading for this channel You can program this parameter to any value between 0 and 252 The default value for this parameter is 0 6 12 4 2 12 Flow Label Program this parameter with a text string which identifies the particular fluid flow parameter being monitored by this channel Maretron display products will display this label text when you are selecting data to display 6 12 4 2 13 Volume Instance Program this parameter to match the desired instance number of the volume
57. section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value 6 1 4 NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable The transducer transmits several different NUEA2000 PGN s which can be turned on or turned off by the DSM250 display Pressing the Enter key with NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable menu item selected causes the DSM250 to display the NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable screen You can enable or disable the transmission of the these messages or set the frequency of transmission of the message by pressing the Enter key on the message to be configured Options are e Off The message will not be transmitted e On The message will be transmitted at its default NMEA 2000 rate Select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 1 5 Clear Speed Calibration The Clear Speed Calibration configuration parameter shows you the currently used correction factor All measured STW readings are multiplied by this number before being transmitted over the NMEA 2000 network You can remove the correction factor by pressing the Enter key with the Clear Speed Calibration menu item selected And then choose Clear using Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key This changes the correction factor back to 1 Page 48 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron such that all subsequent measured STW readings are no longer adjusted before begin transmitted over the NMEA 2000 network
58. sounded on the DSM250 and the Remote Annunciators can be set here This allows the user to configure the Alerts so that the alert can be identified from the tone The values for Tone are Beeps A continuous series of half second on half second off beeps is sounded This corresponds to the requirements for IMO Code 3 a Continuous A continuous tone is sounded This corresponds to the requirements for IMO Code 2 General Emergency A series of seven one second on one second off tones are sounded followed by a single tone of 7 seconds on The sequence is repeated This corresponds to the requirements for IMO Code 1a 7 pulse General Emergency Alarm SOLAS III 50 III 6 4 Carbon Monoxide This is a series of four one tenth second on one tenth second off beeps followed by one and a half seconds of silence The sequence is repeated This corresponds to the requirements for Temporal 4 alarms T4 CO Fire This is a series of three half a second on half a second off beeps followed by one and a half seconds of silence The sequence is repeated This corresponds to the requirements for Code 3 ISO 8201 Smoke Fire Page 230 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 8 3 10 Remote Annunciators Selecting the Remote Annunciators option will bring up a list of 16 ALM100 devices If the Annunciator is active on the NMEA2000 bus and the Annunciator has been given a label the label will be displayed in parenthesis alongside the instance number
59. sounding If the condition which caused the alert remains true after the amount of time in this field the alert will return to the Active state and annunciators will begin sounding again for that alert If a value of 0 00 is entered then the alert will never re trigger Alert Set Delay If the switch being monitored is in the Tripped state for the amount of time specified in this field the alert will become active Alert Clear Delay If the switch being monitored is in a state other than Tripped for the amount of time specified in this field the alert will become inactive 8 3 7 7 Trigger Type is Outside Radius Alert The Outside Radius Alert is used to signal an alert whenever the vessel moves outside a programmable distance in any direction away from a reference point expressed as a longitude and latitude This alert is useful when the vessel is anchored or moored and the vessel should not drift outside a perimeter and if it does an alert is activated The point of reference can be selected from the current position or it can be manually entered Figure 264 shows an Outside Radius Alert and associated parameters The Outside Radius Alert and the Anchor Alert are very similar The radius of the Outside Radius Alert is specified in either Nautical Miles or Kilometers while the radius of the Anchor Alert is specified in Feet or Meters 8 3 7 7 1 Parameters Outside Radius Alert Parameters Gut ate Recher ll dar tare os Vs
60. than the time specified in the Set Delay field Course Alert The alert will become active if the monitored course differs from the Reference Direction by more than the Offset COG Set Point for longer than the time specified in the Set Delay field GPS Quality Alert The alert will become active if the GPS Quality drops below the level set in the GPS Quality Alert Set field for longer than the time specified in the Set Delay field Outside Radius Alert The alert will become active if the distance between the current GPS position and the Reference Latitude and Longitude rises above the value in the Outside Radius Alert Set field for longer than the time specified in the Set Delay field Inside Radius Alert The alert will become active if the distance between the current GPS position and the Reference Latitude and Longitude falls below the value in the Outside Radius Alert Set field for longer than the time specified in the Set Delay field Anchor Alert Similar to the Outside Radius Alert this alert will become active if the distance between the current GPS position and the Reference Latitude and Longitude rises above the value in the Outside Radius Alert Set field for longer than the time specified in the Set Delay field The Anchor Alert is more suited for smaller radii and can be displayed graphically in the Anchor Watch Display Direction Alert The alert will become active if the monitored course differs from the Reference Di
61. that mounting it with the orientation marks facing the bow of the vessel the sensor will read 0 apparent wind angle when the vessel is sailing directly into the wind please refer to the WSO100 User s Manual for details However the WSO100 can be installed in any orientation with respect to the vessel and any misalignment with respect to the factory preset can be easily compensated for using the Installation Offset calibration menu item To perform installation offset calibration use the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys to move the highlighted cursor to the Installation Offset Calibration menu item and then press the Enter key The Installation Offset screen then appears which is shown in Figure 225 below Installation Offset 11 Point boat directly into wind and motor forward as fast as possible Apparent Direction Apparent Speed 177 4 ch Degree Miles hour 12 Once up to speed press lt Accept gt to complete Power Accept Figure 225 wso100 Installation Offset Screen Turn the vessel directly into the wind and motor forward When you are satisfied that the apparent wind is directly on the bow of the vessel press the Accept key to set this angle to read 0 apparent wind on the WSO100 The WSO100 will only calibrate if the apparent wind speed is greater than 2 2 Revision 1 4 16a Page 193 DSM250 User s Manual miles hour If the apparent wind speed is lower than this
62. the Expected data appears as a dash instead of a value device providing the data to the network is in transmitting a valid data value Data fluctuates between two different Two devices on the network are transmitting the values same data Check the Instance Numbers on all devices transmitting that data If these steps do not solve your problem please contact Maretron Technical Support refer to section12 for contact information Warning There are no user serviceable components inside the Maretron DSM250 Opening the DSM250 will expose the sensitive electronic components to adverse environmental conditions that may render the unit inoperative Please do not open the DSM250 as this will automatically void the warranty If service is required please return the unit to an authorized Maretron service location Revision 1 4 16a Page 239 DSM250 User s Manual 11 Technical Specifications Specifications Comment NMEA 2000 Standard Highest Level of Certification NMEA 2000 DeviceNet Micro C Industry Standard Waterproof Connector Certifications NMEA 2000 Maritime Navigation and Radiocommunication Equipment amp Tested to IEC 60945 systems FCC and CE Mark Electromagnetic Compatibility Supported Display Data Types Average Frequency Average L N Voltage Average L L Voltage Phase A Frequency Phase A L N Voltage Phase AB L L Voltage Phase B Frequency Phase B L N Voltage Phase BC L L Voltage Phase C Frequen
63. the engine as a percentage of rated torque Trip Fuel Used displays the total amount of fuel consumed on the present trip Revision 1 4 16a Page 15 DSM250 User s Manual 4 2 9 Environment Barometric displays the current atmospheric barometric pressure Heat Index displays the current heat index based on air temperature and humidity Humidity Inside displays the relative humidity from an indoor humidity sensor Humidity Outside displays the relative humidity for an outdoor humidity sensor Moon Phase displays the phase of the moon at the current time and position Sunrise displays the local time of sunrise for the current day and position Sunset displays the local time of sunset for the current day and position Dew Point displays the current dew point based on air temperature and humidity Temp Engine Room displays the air temperature from a sensor mounted in an engine room Temp Inside displays the air temperature from a sensor mounted inside the vessel Temp Main Cabin displays the air temperature from a sensor mounted inside the main cabin Temp Outside displays the air temperature from a sensor mounted outside Temp Sea displays the current temperature of the water Twilight AM displays the time of nautical twilight before sunrise for the current day and position Twilight PM displays the time of nautical twilight after sunset for the current day and position Weather displays a screen with a
64. then an error message will appear which is shown in Figure 226 below and the calibration process will be aborted _ Installation Unable to set the installation offset Hote Installation offset can be done only at wind speed more than 1 mis 22 mph Accept Figure 226 WS0100 Configuration Aborted Due to Low Wind Speed If the wind speed is sufficient then a confirmation screen shown in Figure 227 below will appear indicating that a successful installation offset calibration has completed Installation Figure 227 Installation Offset Success Confirmation Screen You may instead abort calibration by pressing the Abort Key If you do this the installation offset calibration process will be aborted and a message will appear noting that this has happened which appears in Figure 228 below Page 194 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Installation Offset Figure 228 Installation Offset Abort Confirmation Screen 6 30 4 Wind Data Damping Period The WSO100 comes from the factory preset with a damping period of 1 5 seconds which should be appropriate for most applications However you may use the DSM250 to tune the damping period to anywhere between 0 1 seconds and 5 0 seconds if you desire To do this use the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys to move the highlighted cursor to the Wind Data Damping Period menu item then press the Enter key to move the hi
65. time a key is pressed Conversely the keypad beep may be disabled if desired Page 34 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Display Settings Language English Backlight Color Setup EEN Jemo Mode Op Bus Status Serial Port Settings Power Figure 22 Setting the Keyboard Beep Option 5 2 4 7 Label Each DSM250 can be given a software label Normally this label will indicate the position of the DSM250 and is used by the Alert System to identify one DSM250 from another Display Settings Advanced Configuration Advanced Information Backlight Color Setup Demo Mode Off Normal Use Mode Keypad Beep Off Label Language English Software Version 1 4 2b6 Figure 23 Editing the DSM250 Label 5 2 4 8 Language The DSM250 currently supports two languages English and Dutch Nederlands Support for other languages is planned for future firmware releases To change the currently used language use the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys to move the highlight to the Language menu item and then press the Enter key to move the highlight to the language selection on the right Use the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys to change the selection to the desired value and then press the Enter key to confirm your selection The DSM250 will then reset itself after which the selected language will be used for menus and titles 5 2 4 9 Software Version This field displays t
66. to confirm your selection and store the value within the RAA100 Page 146 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SHY HW SWe 62 Maretron RAA DO 9999 10 14 9 Advanced Configuration Label Stbd Rudder Angle Calibration Rudder Number 1 Dual rudder starboard Operating Mode NMEA2000 amp Analog Gauge Gauge Resistance to sender 135 Gauge Resistance to sender EE Cancel Increase Decrease Accept Figure 155 RAA100 Setting the to Sender Gauge Resistance Revision 1 4 16a Page 147 DSM250 User s Manual 6 20 Maretron RIM100 Configuration This describes the configuration of the Maretron RIM100 firmware version 1 1 1 The DSM250 may be used to configure the channels on the Run Indicator Module RIM100 After selecting the RIM100 from the list of devices on the network the following screen will be displayed Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model Sg HW SWE D4 Maretron HIM 100 MAL 10 111 Device Label engine room Instance 2 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 4 Figure 156 RIM100 Configuration Screen 6 20 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea C
67. vessel the direction the vessel is pointing relative to true or magnetic north depending on the unit setting of the heading parameter see section 5 2 7 1 Rate of Turn displays the angular rate of rotation of the vessel about the vertical axis Variation displays the magnetic variation used to convert between true and magnetic headings 4 2 14 Humidity Inside displays the relative humidity from an indoor humidity sensor Outside displays the relative humidity from an outdoor humidity sensor Revision 1 4 16a Page 17 DSM250 User s Manual User Defined 129 User Defined 144 displays the relative humidity from humidity sensors of user defined types 4 2 15 Indicator Status displays the on off status of an indicator 4 2 16 Navigation The DSM250 is not a primary navigation device that is it does not provide means for entering and storing waypoint and route data The DSM250 can receive information on the current leg of the voyage from a primary navigation device such as a chart plotter or PC with navigation software and NMEA 20007 interface and display this information Bearing Orig to Dest displays the direction from the origin waypoint to the destination waypoint Bearing To Waypoint displays the bearing to the destination waypoint Course Over Ground displays the current Course over Ground always referenced to true north Cross Track Error displays the cross track error minimum distance from the bo
68. will not need to modify the default value of O unless you have multiple units on the network 6 5 5 Label A label may be assigned to the DCM100 as an aid to identifying the device over the network Typically this label will describe the battery or device which the DCM100 is monitoring See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value Revision 1 4 16a Page 67 DSM250 User s Manual 6 6 Maretron DCR100 Configuration The DSM250 is capable of configuring the Maretron DCR100 DC Relay device This section describes the configuration of the Maretron DCR100 firmware version 1 1 1 The main DCR100 configuration screen is shown below Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HWE SW A8 Maretron DCR 100 T1999 20 1113 Advanced Configuration DEST ETT HELM RELAY BOX Si Instance Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Figure 55 DCR100 Configuration Screen 6 6 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HWE SW A8 Maretron DCR 100 1 1995 20 1113 Advanced Configuration Device Instance 0 Installation Description NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Resto
69. 0 1 0 Figure 219 below shows a screenshot of the VDR100 configuration menu Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HWE SW 28 Maretron VDRW0 2097651 10 1010 Advanced Configuration Label Figure 219 VDR100 Configuration Screen 6 29 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HW SW Z Maretron VDR 100 AT 1 10 10 10 Advanced Configuration Device Instance far Installation Description Restore Factory Defaults Figure 220 VDR100 Advanced Configuration Screen 6 29 1 1 Device Instance Revision 1 4 16a Page 189 DSM250 User s Manual This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the unit You usually will not need to modify the default value of O unless you have multiple units on the network 6 29 1 2 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later 6 29 1 3 Restore Factory Defaults This option res
70. 0 11 Advanced Configuration nstallation Offset Calibration Invert Installation Normal Installation Label Magnetic Deviation Calibration Magnetic Deviation Status Rate of Turn Damping Period 2 0s Rate of Turn Zero Offset Calibration Variation Source NMEA0183 or NMEA2000 3 Scroll Scroll Power Up Down Figure 164 SSC200 Configuration Screen 6 22 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNe HWe Swe 49 Maretron SL A0 T2 20 20 11 Advanced Configuration Device Instance f Installation Description NMEA0183 Settings NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Restore Factory Defaults Scroll Down Power Figure 165 SSC200 Advanced Configuration Screen 6 22 1 1 Device Instance This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the unit You usually will not need to modify the default value of O unless you have multiple units on the network Page 154 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 6 22 1 2 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which i
71. 0 Advanced Configuration Screen 6 16 1 1 Device Instance Program this parameter to the desired instance number for this device You can program this parameter to any value between 0 and 252 The default device instance is 0 Page 128 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 6 16 1 2 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later The default installation description is blank text 6 16 1 3 N2KServer Information This entry allows you to view various information about the N2KServer running on the IPG100 The following sections describe the entries in this menu Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model Sg HW SWE 9 Maretron IPG 100 BA 10 10 69 Advanced Configuration N2KServer Information Client List N KServer Version 3 2 20110208 License Key Number 500 Platinum Licenses 2 20 Basic Licenses 0 0 Figure 130 IPG100 N2KServer Information Screen 6 16 1 3 1 Client List For each N2KView client connected to the IPG100 this entry displays the following information e Lic License this field indicates the type of N2KView license in use by the client It will indicate P for a platinum license and B f
72. 0 Magnetic Deviation Calibration Start Screen Once you have begun the turn press Begin to start the calibration procedure If you do not wish to perform magnetic deviation calibration at this time press Abort and the currently stored deviation tables will be retained If you are in a large vessel it may be difficult to turn the vessel in a small enough circle to avoid significant centrifugal force applied to the compass during magnetic deviation calibration This can cause the built in tilt sensors inside the compass to mistakenly believe that the compass is tilted during the magnetic deviation calibration which can adversely affect the quality of the magnetic deviation calibration especially in northerly latitudes where magnetic inclination magnetic dip is higher If this is the case instead of pressing the Begin key press the No Acc key This will cause the compass to ignore its tilt sensors and assume that the compass is level to the earth s surface during the calibration You must keep the boat level during calibration if you choose this option After you press the Begin key or the No Acc key a status screen will appear Figure 173 Revision 1 4 16a Page 159 DSM250 User s Manual Magnetic Deviation Calibration Completed 0 of 3 circles Heading Rate of Turn 37 9 3 1 Degrees Magnetic Degrees second Current Status Deviation in Progress Last Status Idle Power
73. 0 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen You can enable or disable the transmission of the Binary Switch Status message or set the frequency of transmission of the message by pressing the Enter key on the message to be configured Options are e Disable The status message will not be transmitted e Default The status message will be transmitted at its default NUEA2000 rate which is once every 15 seconds and each time the value changes e 1s 15s The status message will be transmitted at the period specified and each time the value changes Select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 20 1 4 Restore Factory Defaults This option restores all settings on the device to their factory default state 6 20 2 Device Label A label may be assigned to the RIM100 as an aid to identifying the device over the network Typically this label will describe the location of the RIM100 See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value Revision 1 4 16a Page 149 DSM250 User s Manual 6 20 3 Instance From here the instance used in the data message may be set 6 20 4 Channel Configuration To configure an individual channel use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons to highlight the channel and then press Enter The following screen will be displayed Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HWE SW D4 Maretron RIM SN MAIL 10 111 Channel
74. 0 min sec Alert Set Point F Alert Set Delay 0 00 min sec Alert Clear Point F Alert Clear Delay 0 00 min sec Local Audible Enable Tone Continuous Remote Annunciator s Operating Mode_Moored Enable Operating Mode_Underway Enable Figure 257 Trigger Configuration High Alert Re trigger Period When you accept an alert it will change to the Accepted state and annunciators that are sounding for that alert will stop sounding If the condition which caused the alert remains true after the amount of time in this field the alert will return to the Active state and annunciators will begin sounding again for that alert The value is entered as minutes seconds If only one number is entered it will be interpreted as seconds If a value of 0 00 is entered then the alert will never re trigger Alert Set Point If the value of the parameter being monitored rises above the value in this field the alert will become active Alert Set Delay The parameter being monitored must rise above the Alert Set Point value for longer than the time in this field in order for an alert to become active This can be used to prevent false alerts caused by parameter values that briefly have a value that would cause an alert but quickly return to the normal value range The value is entered as minutes seconds If only one number is entered it will be interpreted as seconds Alert Clear Point If the alert
75. 00 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen 177 Figure 202 Configuring the Tank CGapacity 178 Figure 203 Tank Capacity Change Confirmation Gcreen 178 Figure 204 Performing Custom Calibration of the Tank Level Montor 179 Figure 205 Tank Levels Calibration Capacity Estimation cccccccceccseeceeeeeeeceeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaees 179 Figure 206 Empty Level Calibration EEN 180 Figure 207 Intermediate Level Calibration cccccccccccccecceeeceece cece eeseeeeeeseeeceeeseeeseesseeseeseeeneees 180 Figure 206 Full Level C lee ME 181 Figure 209 Custom Tank Level Calibration Confirmation Screen s nsennannnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnrenrnnnnnnnne 181 Figure 210 Rectangular Tank Gelechon 182 Figure 2 11 Rectangular Tank Calbration EE 182 Figure 212 TMP100 Configuration Gcreen cece eeseeseeesueceeeseeeseeeseeeseesaess 184 Figure 213 TMP100 Advanced Configuration Gcreen 184 Figure 214 TMP100 NMEA 20007 PGN Enable Disable Screen 185 Figure 215 TMP100 Channel Configuration Screen ees eeeeeeeueceeeceeeseeeaeeeaeeeaues 186 Figure 216 USB 100 Configuration SChE ON BEE 187 Figure 217 USB100 Advanced Configuration Gcreen 187 Figure 218 USB100 Device Selection Gcreen cc eccccccsccceecceeeceeeseeceeeceeeseeseueseeseeeseeesaeeaeesaues 188 Figure 219 IOU COnngUrallOM SClEC WEE 189 Figure 220 VDR100 Advanced Configuration Gcreen 189 Figure 221 WSO100 Configuration Gcreen A E ON 190
76. 02 10 19 OF Maretron DST Wo 110003 10 10 hlaretron USB 400 THOM 10 16 D hlaretron DS AN 1100005 2 LN 6 Maretron WSaOHNI 1200006 10 10 0 B9 Maretron TLAMO 0009010 CO Maretron RAA 100 1 10 DS Lowrance EP 30 voog 10 10 Power Bach Figure 32 Device Configuration Screen The NA column of the menu displays the node address the device is using The Manufacturer column of the menu displays the manufacturer of the device The Model column displays the model number of the device Revision 1 4 16a Page 45 DSM250 User s Manual The SN column displays the serial number of the device so that any of two or more devices of the same manufacturer and model number may be distinguished from one another The HW column shows the device hardware version The SW column shows the device software version firmware version Page 46 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 6 1 Airmar Depth Speed Temperature Transducers The DSM250 supports configuration and calibration of the following Airmar Depth Speed Temperature transducers that have NMEA 2000 interfaces e DST800 DT800 P39 P79 B122 ST850 ST800 HT200 The following calibration functions are supported not all functions apply to every model of transducer e Reset trip log e Set depth Offset e Perform Speed Calibration e Program Temperature Offset Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model
77. 09 Custom Tank Level Calibration Confirmation Screen 6 13 2 1 6 2 Rectangular Tank This menu allows calibration of the FPM100 for tanks with a rectangular cross section Empty Tank Depth enter the depth of the fluid when the tank is empty this distance is usually zero Full Tank Depth enter the depth of the fluid when the tank is full this is the distance from the surface of the fluid to the bottom of the tank Fluid Density enter the density of the fluid whose depth is being measured There are preset values for various types of diesel fuels as well as gasoline and water Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model Sg HWg 9 Maretron FPH 100 ORK 10 Channel 9 Tank Levels Calibration Rectangular Tank Empty Tank Depth HN Full Tank Depth eo Fluid Density Diesel Fuel 20 820 Figure 110 Rectangular Tank Calibration 6 13 2 1 7 Tank Number The Tank Number is the Data Instance used in the data message This can be set from 0 to 15 6 13 2 1 8Tank Type This is set to the type of fluid in the tank Values are Page 114 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Fuel Fresh Water Waste Water Live Well Oil Black Water Reserved 1 Reserved These values may be used when the contents of the tank does not fit into one of the categories above 6 13 2 1 9Data Damping Period If the channel s Function is set to Tank the default data damping period is 16 0 secon
78. 1 Mode Enable EAH Anchor Winch Figure 159 RIM100 Channel Configuration Screen 6 20 4 1 Mode Each Channel may be enabled or disabled Valid Modes are Disable the channel is not being used Enable the channel is being used Select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 20 4 2 Label A label may be assigned to a channel as an aid to identifying the channel over the network Typically this label will describe the equipment to which the channel is connected See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value Page 150 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 6 21 Maretron SIM100 Configuration This describes the configuration of the Maretron SIM100 firmware version 1 1 1 The DSM250 may be used to configure the channels on the Switch Indicator Module SIM100 After selecting the SIM100 from the list of devices on the network the following screen will be displayed Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model sH HW SW DS Maretron SIM NW HAM 10 111 Advanced Configuration Device Label P H DC CKTS Instance 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 4 Figure 160 SIM100 Configuration Screen 6 21 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only
79. 100 comes from the factory preprogrammed with the characteristics of boost pressure gauge types for supported engines If the EMS100 is used with an analog boost pressure gauge you must select the correct type of gauge for this setting in order for the data to be displayed correctly Valid options are Revision 1 4 16a Page 91 DSM250 User s Manual e No Gauge select this option if there is no boost pressure gauge present e YANMAR Select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 11 3 Boost Pressure Sender Type The EMS100 comes from the factory preprogrammed with the characteristics of boost pressure senders for supported engines If the engine to which you are connecting the EMS100 has a boost pressure sender you must select the correct type of boost pressure sender for this setting in order for the data to be displayed correctly Valid options are e Disabled select this option if there is no boost pressure sender present e YANMAR e YANMAR W THRESHOLD Select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 11 4 Boost Pressure Sender Offset Often the characteristics of individual boost pressure senders vary from their specified values This setting allows you to apply an offset to the resistance value of the boost pressure sender in order to allow you to bring the digital value reported by the EMS100 into agreement with that displayed by t
80. 13 Operating Mode Anchored see section 4 3 4 for a description of Operating Modes For this Alert to be triggered when the vessel is in the Anchored state this option must be set to Enabled The options here are e Enable e Disable The desired option is selected using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons and then pressing the Enter button again 8 3 14 Scope Alerts may be constrained to be displayed only on the DSM250 where they are detected In this case the Alert message is not sent out on the NMEA2000 bus and other devices will not display the alert or allow Accepting of Cancelling The Scope does not affect the generation of Annunciator messages The options here are e Local the Alert messages are not transmitted e Global the Alert messages are transmitted The desired option is selected using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons and then pressing the Enter button again 8 4 Deleting an Alert From the Alert Setup Menu selected the menu item Delete Alert Alert Setup Add New Alert Edit Alert Operating Mode Disable Advanced Configuration Restore Factory Defaults Figure 272 Deleting an Alert Page 232 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron This brings up the list of Alerts managed by the DSM2590 Alert Setup Delete Alert Priority Enab Type Description Yes Global Alarm Yes Global Alarm Yes Global Alarm Anchor Watch Yes Global Alarm Yes Global Alarm Yes Global Alarm Yes Glo
81. 144 Page vi Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 6 19 95 Operating lee 145 6 19 6 Gauge Resistance to Gender 146 0 19 7 Gauge Resistanc 10 SENAT E 146 6 20 Maretron RIM100 Configuration ccc cccccceccsecceeececeseeseeceeeseeeseessueeseeseeseeeseeeseeesess 148 6 20 1 Advanced CGontfguraton scsccecsercesinderiicencerdcepi deni erid aredas isa iaeia N i 148 Eh EE CIDO orea E E E E E N 149 SSC E SANCO mape E E E E NE EE 150 6 20 4 Channel Configuration sessirnir ar eee id a ee ai eadeni 150 6 21 Mareton SIM100 CONMGUIATION secrecisrirercesrin irere r eun E EEr E CaSe SAAN A EEN SESAN TEN 151 6 21 1 Advanced ue EC le E 151 OZ Re E e 152 eZ co bn LO ue 153 0214 Channel EEN 153 6 22 Maretron SSC200 Configuration ccccccccccceccceeeseeeeeeceeeceeeseeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeseeseeeseesaeeeaess 154 0 221 E ele ere Beie UE de ET 154 6 22 2 Installation Offset Calibration cc cccccccceceseee eee eeceeeseeeseeeeeeeeeesseeseeeaeesseeteeseeegs 157 6 22 3 INVEMEG INSANAUON ENUY EE 158 SEN En EEN 159 6 22 5 Magnetic Deviation Calibration ccccccccccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeseeeseeeaeesseeeeeeseeees 159 6 22 6 Magnetic Deviation Status ccccccccccceeeceeeceeeceeeeeceeeceeeeeceeeceeceeeseeeseeeaeeseeeseeess 160 6 22 7 Rate Tum Damping P CllOG EE 160 6 22 8 Rate of Turn Zero Offset Calbratpnon 161 022 9 VON OC d ee 161 6 23 Wiaketron EE GEIER Ee 165 023 1 Advanced Ci e EE 165 SE GC Ee ee ee
82. 2 6 30 23 INStalalOMvOnSel CAIN AU OM E 193 6 50 4 Vvind Data D ampinGil GROG EE 195 6 30 5 Barometric Pressure eebe eebe EES EEN 195 6 30 6 OUSIDE ROMIG E 196 630 7 Outside Jee EE 196 EE EE ENEE tee 198 Lol HEEN 198 T Goomass ROSE RE EEN 199 fo Gauge RE EE 200 FA GEET Eelere Ee 201 7 5 Numeric Display 202 LO ROIM ROAA DEE 203 Gl ENE ET BEE 204 kon EE EE ENEE EE 204 E NVNAROSO esas caeceteacin tata E Sei ee cs oie 206 110 MOON enee DISDIAY cesce E E 206 PALE MI Ee ID ISDIAY E 206 7212 SWING eege ege 207 7 13 Tank Gauge Uusplayv 207 LAA SWIGR Breaker DIE ET 208 O EE 212 Oe DEET NANG IVE AO ER 212 EN DE En Een EE 212 8 2 Accepting or Cancelling an Ale EE 213 621 Foma Favole SCC WEE 213 8 2 2 From the Alen Status SGre E 213 8 3 Adding TE AICM E 214 ores gl Me ENDA DI S 6 2 le Li e Penner eee eer eee eee eee ee ee ee ee eee eee 215 e TRICE WV Pe aeea a a 215 Se WE Giele LEE 215 Gro MOJE SOUC O o E 216 099 RI ele e EE 216 DO ee EE 216 Sos Mogge COMMUN ANON EEN 216 039 LOCAIAUGIDIG EEN 230 E E SR en recesderesqrativotoretevelauaiavenwaibooiaedidieldeensesaicsaseuniecaseoniccaseniecaeeniecaucensdseieeereuerainsseern 230 8 3 10 ROMOLI ANMUNGIAION S E 231 8 3 11 Operating Mode Moore 231 S 3212 Operating Mode Bn le 231 8 3 19 Een Le ele ANEMONE ME 232 DIA SCODE aa E 232 ER El e EI EE 232 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron G20 el lte ANANSI EN 233 8 6 Setting the Vessel Operating Mode 235 SES SE Ee E Ne
83. 2 5 2 3 Engine Label Each channel has a text label you can set to identify the load controlled by that channel for example PORT ENGINE or COOLING WATER FLOW For each channel set this to a value which describes the flow being monitored so that you can easily identify it in display devices 6 12 5 2 4K Factor Program this parameter to match the K factor that appears on the flow sensor connected to this channel 6 12 5 2 5Data Damping Period You can configure a damping parameter to smooth the flow rate readings or make them more responsive The data damping is configurable between 0 2 25 0 seconds The default data damping period is 3 0 seconds 6 12 5 2 6Reset Total Volume Recorded The FFM100 maintains the total volume recorded in EEPROM so that it is maintained across power cycles Select this menu entry to reset the total volume recorded to zero 6 12 5 2 7 Temperature Instance Program this parameter to match the desired instance number of the temperature reading for this channel You can program this parameter to any value between 0 and 252 The default value for this parameter is 0 6 12 5 2 8 Temperature Source Program this parameter to match the desired source type of the temperature reading for this channel The default value for this parameter is 129 User Defined 6 12 5 2 9 Temperature Label Program this parameter with a text string which identifies the particular temperature parameter being monitored by this cha
84. 52 RAA100 Setting the Rudder Number 145 Figure 153 RAA100 Setting the Operating Mode cece eeseeeeeeceeeceeeceeeseeeseeeaues 145 Figure 154 RAA100 Setting the to Sender Gauge Resistance c cece ceccceeceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaees 146 Figure 155 RAA100 Setting the to Sender Gauge Hesistance cece cecceeeceeeceeeceeeaeeeaeeeaees 147 Figure 156 RIM100 Configuration Gcreen 148 Figure 157 RIM100 Advanced Configuration Gcreen 148 Figure 158 RIM100 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen 149 Figure 159 RIM100 Channel Configuration Screen cccccccecceeeceeeceeececeseeeaeeseeeseeseeeseeeaeesaues 150 Figure 160 SIM100 Configuration Screen ccc cecccccccccceccceeeaeeeeeeceeeceeeceeeseeseeeeueeeeeseeeseeeaeeeseesaees 151 Figure 161 SIM100 Advanced Configuration Gcreen 151 Figure 162 SIM100 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen 152 Figure 163 SIM100 Channel Configuration Gcreen 153 Figure 164 SSC200 Configuration Gcreen 154 Figure 165 SSC200 Advanced Configuration Gcreen 154 Figure 166 SSC200 NMEA 0183 Settings Gcreen cece cccceeeceeeceeeceeeeesaeeceeeseeeseeeseeeaeesaues 155 Figure 167 SSC200 NMEA 0183 Sentence Rate Selection Gcreen 156 Figure 168 SSC200 Load Default Periodic Rate Selection cc ecccccccecceeeeeeeceeeceeseeeaeeeaeeeaees 156 Figure 169 SSC200 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen 157 Figure 1 0 SSC200 Installation
85. 6 MeN OR se eek spd snd nod ond asinda od aed atid E nd ota soins E EE aac 17 eked WIC AIAG EE 17 aed E L t lel E 17 AA T 0 OF 10 EE 18 ZO NAVIGON eeen ce ioe sees cate E EEO EE EEE EE 18 A2 I RUGIGI EE 18 4 2 18 Pressure Vacuum E 18 KE WE Ce 19 ZL SCS erp pets utes gh nse ons saws ye oh eisai boss Gest seis iad saint ep eso stevia sda seanbdadannahaneaonasanteseones 19 e SC En 19 e D VCMMDCFAQU A E E E E E E 19 Revision 1 4 16a Page ili DSM250 User s Manual 7225 MIMIC vaccuabahaanoasaeaeeeneanaedcmeieagncaiasaenaciaaneaaaeacaiacahaeatscaednaeieaaanaineaan saben igauaie tananeeaenaReRe INS 19 A Zoo VTANSIMISSION EE 20 Ek NVDR eea eeh 20 eZ OF VOSS EE 20 le ME 20 A 6c Re eee eee 22 a WEE a Ke 22 Bos TACT EN on ge ile EE 22 74 Here EE 22 4 3 4 Vessel Alert Operating Modes nannannanonnnnnnnnnnnnnonnonnnnrnnrnrrnrrrrrnrrnronrnnrnrrnrrnrrnernrnnene 22 Ao age 23 EE en 24 e mes 821 82 111 6 pt ee 25 Dal Fone TEE EIERE Eer 25 922 MENU MOGE EE 26 Sec Aler sSetp EE ee ee 2 S22 PCM OlAlUS tee EE 27 929 Coniguraton MENU EE 27 O24 Display SEHINGS Mern Uzsonna a 29 5 2 9 Favorite Screens MOdeC cccccceccsecsseceeceseceeeeeecseteeeasecseceeetaeteeesneceeeeeeteeeeeseeteeegaess 36 520 FaVOrnie Screens e MENU EE 36 e D UNE WIC E 40 6 DEVICE e aire Un LR 44 6 1 Airmar Depth Speed Temperature Transducers noenonsensnrensnreronrerrnrsrrnrsrrrrrrrerrrrerrn 47 6 1 1 Advanced CGontfgura
86. 6 1 6 Speed Calibration The Airmar speed transducer speed through water STW initial accuracy is significantly affected by the location or placement of the speed transducer within the hull The speed transducer can be corrected for these inaccuracies using the speed calibration procedure You calibrate the speed transducer STW by pressing the Enter key with the Speed Calibration menu item selected which results in the screen shown in Figure 77 speed Calibration 1 Select Speed Through Water 2 Press lt Accept gt to complete Power Abort Increase Decrease Accept Figure 35 Calibrating the Airmar Speed Transducer Speed The speed calibration screen shown in Figure 77 indicates the STW as measured by the Airmar speed transducer which can be changed to the transmitted STW by following these steps First pick a speed where you are most concerned with the best accuracy Next bring the boat up to the desired speed using some other source perhaps the GPS speed over ground SOG Remember that the SOG does not necessary reflect the STW because of currents and drift due to winds so you should do this in an area where you are sure there are no currents and calm winds Finally use the Increase and Decrease keys to adjust the display value until it matches the known speed of the boat Press the Accept key to accept the value when you are satisfied If you do not wish to perform speed calibration at this time pr
87. Accept gt to complete Power Abort Increase Decrease Accept Figure 36 Airmar Temperature Transducer Water Temperature Calibration Screen 6 1 9 Transducer Depth Offset The DSM250 can set the transducer depth offset parameter in an Airmar depth transducer If you are interested in the actual water depth as opposed to the depth beneath the keel then you should program a positive value equal to the distance from the waterline to the depth of the depth transducer The DSM250 will then add the measured depth of the water as seen by the depth transducer to the programmed offset value to produce the total water depth If you are interested in the depth of water beneath the keel then you should program a negative value equal to the distance between the depth transducer and the bottom of the keel The DSM will then subtract the programmed offset from the measured depth of the water as seen by the depth transducer showing you the depth of water beneath the keel You program the transducer depth offset by pressing the Enter key with the Transducer Depth Offset menu item selected which results in the screen shown in Figure 78 Page 50 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HWE SW 23 Airmar DST200 BEH H 127 i 1003 10 Advanced Configuration Clear Speed Calibration Clear Speed Calibration Clear Temperature Offset 0 0 F Temperature Calibration Tra
88. Aert tranaitions t the Aomaiting Cancel shia after Cleer Daley seconds H N RER below High Alert Cinar Delay Gear Point High Alert Set Point Input Signal High Alert Gear Point Time Figure 256 High Alert Parameters A high alert is triggered i e becomes an active alert once an input signal has risen above the High Alert Set Point and the Set Delay time has elapsed If the Set Delay is set to zero then the alert is immediately triggered once the input signal rises above the High Alert Set Point The Set Delay is used to reduce false or spurious alerts As an example setting the Set Delay to 5 seconds will eliminate any temporary transitions of the input signal above the High Alert Set Point lasting less than 5 seconds from triggering an alert Once the alert is triggered it becomes an active alert An alert remains active until e The input signals falls below the High Alert Clear Point and the Clear Delay time has elapsed If the Clear Delay is set to zero then the alert immediately transitions to the Awaiting Cancel once the input signal falls below the High Alert Clear Point as shown in the example above e The user accepts the alert in which case it transitions into the Accepted state The Clear Delay is used to reduce false or spurious alerts 8 3 7 1 2 Trigger Configuration Revision 1 4 16a Page 217 DSM250 User s Manual Alert Detail Trigger Configuration Trigger Type GIES Re triqger Period 0 0
89. Barometric Pressure Use the Increase and Decrease buttons to select the correct pressure and the press the Enter button to store it 6 30 6 Outside Humidity The Humidity is pre calibrated before leaving the factory and should not require adjustment However the current humidity level may be entered in this screen to re calibrate the WSO100 should this be required Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNe HWe SW 8A Maretron W500 TAH 20 207 Advanced Configuration Device Label ROOF Installation Offset Calibration Wind Data Damping Period 4 0s Barometric Pressure 29 80 Inches Mercury Outside Humidity BERRI Outside Temperature 82 F Cancel Increase Decrease Accept Figure 231 Setting the Outside Humidity Use the Increase and Decrease buttons to select the correct humidity and the press the Enter button to store it 6 30 7 Outside Temperature The Temperature sensor is pre calibrated before leaving the factory and should not require adjustment However the current temperature may be entered in this screen to re calibrate the WS0O100 should this be required Page 196 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model Ob HW SW 8A Maretron WSOE LANZ 20 207 Advanced Configuration Device Label ROOF Installation Offset Calibration Wind Data Damping Period 4 0s Barometric Pressure 29 80 Inches Mercury Outside Humidity 12 Percen
90. Calibration Custom Calibration Rectangular Tank Figure 103 FPM100 Tank Levels Calibration Menu 6 13 2 1 6 1 Custom Calibration The Custom Calibration setting will provide the most accurate tank level readings under any circumstances but it requires that you go through a process in which you gradually fill the tank stopping periodically to input the current fluid level The TLA100 will measure the sender resistance at each point and create a custom calibration map which relates the resistance of the sender with the fluid levels Figure 104 below shows a screenshot of the DSM250 with the Custom Calibration option highlighted Custom calibration is necessary for non rectangular tanks and for non standard values of resistances for tank level senders To perform custom calibration of the tank level sender use the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys to move the highlighted cursor over the Custom Calibration menu item Then press the Enter key to confirm your selection and begin the calibration process Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HVI SH TO Maretron TLA WO AT Di 10 14 Tank Levels Calibration Custom Calibration Set to American Standard 240 33 ohm Set to European Standard 10 180 ohm Scroll Scroll Ur Down Figure 104 Performing Custom Calibration of the Tank Level Adapter Revision 1 4 16a Page 111 DSM250 User s
91. Current Point 3456 7 IWNRBHHH Power Complete Increase Decrease Accept Figure 189 Intermediate Level Calibration Once the tank is completely full instead of pressing the Accept key to store the current calibration point press the Complete key This will complete the calibration process and will also adjust the tank capacity to the currently indicated level Figure 190 below shows the calibration screen at the last point with the full tank level and thus the tank capacity set to 101 gallons Tank Levels Calibration Only two settings empty and full are required to calibrate rectangular tanks Up to 1 calibration points can be used for irregular shaped tanks 11 Use arrow keys to select current tank level 101 Gal 2 Press lt Accept gt to set calibration point 13 Press lt Complete gt once tank is full to set final calibration point Current Point 1234567 8 INTREDYBE Power Complete Increase Decrease Accept Figure 190 Full Level Calibration After you press accept a confirmation screen will appear showing completion of the calibration process and the new tank capacity value A screenshot of this calibration screen is shown below in Figure 191 Page 170 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Tank Levels Calibration Only two settings empty and full are required to calibrate Tank Level Calibration Completed Successfully Tank capacity will be updated to 101 Gal Power Complet
92. DSM150 DSM250 In this way it is possible to make all device selection changes on a single DSM250 unit and then quickly and conveniently duplicate these new device selection settings on other DSM150 DSM250 units attached to the network below shows this menu item highlighted Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNF HWe SW Ti Maretron DS5SM250 9179 10 13 0 Advanced Configuration Copy alarms settings from local display Copy device selection from local display py display settings from local displa y Copy favorite settings from local display Copy DST100 calibrations from local display Copy all settings from local display Label Test Remote Device Selection Power Enter Figure 67 DSM250 Copy device selection from local display After you select this menu item and press Enter the device selection settings from this DSM250 unit will be copied to the selected remote DSM150 DSM250 unit Revision 1 4 16a Page 77 DSM250 User s Manual 6 8 4 Copy display settings from local displa Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNF HWe SW UV Maretron DSM2 0 T018 10 13 0 Advanced Configuration Copy alarms settings from local display Copy device selection from local display Copy display settings from local display Copy favorite settings from local display op Copy DST100 calibrations from local display Copy all settings from local display Label Test Remote Devic
93. Disable The TLM100 Tank Level Module transmits the NUEA2000 PGN 127505 which can be turned on or turned off by the DSM250 display Pressing the Enter key with NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable menu item selected causes the DSM250 to display the following screen Figure 201 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HWE SW T3 Maretron TLM SN Fal Ti 10 114 Advanced Configuration NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable CE On Figure 201 TLM100 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen You can enable or disable the transmission of the Binary Switch Status message by pressing the Enter key on the message to be configured Options are Off The fluid level message will not be transmitted On The fluid level message will be transmitted at its default NMEA2000 rate which is once every 2 5 seconds Select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 24 1 4 Restore Factory Defaults This option restores all settings on the device to their factory default state 6 24 2 Label A label may be assigned to the TLM100 as an aid to identifying the device over the network Typically this label will describe the location of the TLM100 and a description of the contents of the tank 6 24 3 Tank Capacity In order for the TLM100 to produce readings of the amount of fluid remaining in the tank the tank capacity must be programmed into the TLM100 adapter Figure 202 below show
94. EE Advanced Configuration Restore Factory Defaults Figure 277 Setting the Vessel Operating Mode The options here are e Disable e Moored e Anchored e Underway 8 Advanced Configuration The Advanced Parameters of the Alert System may be configured through this Screen Enter the screen though the Alert Setup menu and select the Advanced Configuration option Revision 1 4 16a Page 235 DSM250 User s Manual Alert Setup Advanced Configuration WO eel i Enable Flashing Screen Disable Figure 278 Advanced Configuration The following parameters may be set 8 7 1 Remote Alert Audible lf Remote Alerts are enabled and an active alert is received from another device on the bus the DSM250 will respond by adding the Alert to its list of Active Alerts section 8 1 and sounding the internal speaker The sounding of the speaker may be disabled i e only visual indications are displayed by setting this parameter to Disable The options here are e Enable e Disable 8 7 2 Flashing Screen As an extra means to gain the operator s attention to an Active Alert the DSM250 may be set up to flash the entire screen between Red for Alarms or Yellow for Warnings and Black The flashing may be disabled by setting this option to Disable The options here are e Enable e Disable 8 8 Restore Factory Defaults The Alert parameters of the DSM250 may be restored to the factory defaults by pressing the Enter
95. Enter If there is no magnetic variation source available on either the NMEA 2000 or the NMEA 0183 interface and you wish to display true heading information you may manually enter a magnetic variation To set a manual variation value you must change the variation source by pushing the Enter key with the Variation Source menu item selected This highlights the next field where you select Manual Entry by scrolling or through the options until you reach Manual Entry Pressing the Enter key with the Manual Entry menu item selected takes you to the screen shown in Figure 180 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNe HWe SW 49 Maretron SL A0 T2 20 20 11 Advanced Configuration Installation Offset Calibration Invert Installation Normal Installation Label Magnetic Deviation Calibration Magnetic Deviation Status Rate of Turn Damping Period 2 0s Rate of Turn Zero Offset Calibration Variation Source Manual Entry EY Power Enter Up Figure 180 Entering Manual Variation Press the Scroll Up or Scroll Down i key to change the amount of East or West variation Press the Accept Key when the desired number is shown You may also disable manual variation by setting the value to Disable this option appears between the values 0 0 E and 0 1 W when scrolling through the values When manual variation is disabled the SSC200 will
96. GN Enable Disable menu item selected causes the DSM250 to display the following screen Figure 214 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HW SW 29 Maretron TMP 00 420009 10 111 Advanced Configuration NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable 10310 Environmental Parameters pU 110311 Environmental Parameters On THOT 8 Temperature On 1823 Temperature High Range Ott Figure 214 TMP100 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen You can enable or disable the transmission of a PGN message or set the frequency of transmission of the message by pressing the Enter key on the message to be configured Options are Off The PGN will not be transmitted On The PGN will be transmitted at its default NMEA2000 rate 0 5s 5s The PGN will be transmitted at the interval specified Select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 27 1 4 Restore Factory Defaults This option restores all settings on the device to their factory default state 6 27 2 Channel Configuration Individual channels may be configured by using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons to highlight the channel and then pressing the Enter key The following screen will be displayed Revision 1 4 16a Page 185 DSM250 User s Manual Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HWE SW 9 Maretron THP 00 GJ 10 11 Channel ei Instance FJ Source Inside Temper
97. GPS211 JP15 SHIELD SBAS WAAS EGNOS MSAS Enable Down Scroll Scroll Up Figure 111 GPS100 Configuration Screen Page 116 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 6 14 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea The Advanced Configuration Screen is shown below Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HWE SW AC Maretron GPS Ww THO 11 16 4 Advanced Configuration Device Instance D GPS Antenna Altitude 0 00 m GPS Elevation Mask 7 5 GPS PDOP Mask Disable GPS SNR Mask 28 00 dB Installation Description NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Restore Factory Defaults Figure 112 GPS100 Advanced Configuration Screen 6 14 1 1 Device Instance The Device Instance will be used to identify the GPS100 device on the network Unless there are multiple GPSs on the network this should be left at Zero 6 14 1 2 GPS Antenna Altitude The DSM250 is capable of setting the antenna altitude on a Maretron GPS100 You can choose this setting by pressing the Enter key with the Antenna Altitude menu item selected which causes the screen shown in Figure 113 to be displayed Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SHN HW SW 21 Maretron GPS 211 21 Advanced Configuration
98. Generator Phase B Apparent Power displays apparent power output on phase B of the Generator Phase B Power Factor displays power factor of phase B of the Generator Phase C Current displays phase C current of the Generator Page 12 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Phase C Frequency displays frequency of the AC power on phase C of the Generator Phase C L N Voltage displays phase C Line to Neutral RMS voltage of the Generator Phase CA L L Voltage displays phase C Line to phase A Line RMS voltage of the Generator Phase C Real Power displays real power output on phase C of the generator Phase C Reactive Power displays reactive power output on phase C of the Generator Phase C Apparent Power displays apparent power output on phase C of the Generator Phase C Power Factor displays power factor of phase C of the Generator 4 2 3 AC Utility Average Current displays average current of the AC power on the utility Average Frequency displays average frequency of the AC power on the utility Average L N Voltage displays average line to neutral RMS voltage of the AC power on the utility Average L L Voltage displays average line to line RMS voltage of the AC power on the utility Total Real Power displays real power output by the utility Total Reactive Power displays reactive power output by the utility Total Apparent Power displays apparent power output by the utility Total Power Factor displays p
99. Manual The first step in custom calibration of the tank level sender is to provide an estimated capacity of the tank This estimated capacity must be within 25 of the actual capacity To set the estimated tank capacity use the arrow keys to adjust the displayed value until the desired value is shown Then press the Accept key to confirm your selection and continue with the calibration process If you desire to stop the calibration process pressing the Back Key will end the process and return you to the Tank Levels Calibration menu Tank Levels Calibration tank capacity 100 Gal 2 With empty tank press lt Accept gt to begin calibration process 3 Press lt Abort gt to cancel calibration and revert to old calibration data Power Accept Figure 105 Tank Levels Calibration Capacity Estimation The next step in the calibration process is to fill the tank and indicate the volume of fluid in the tank at various points while filling the tank This process should be started with an empty tank You only need to indicate two calibration points for a rectangular tank and can use up to 16 calibration points for a tank with a more complex shape Figure 106 shows a screenshot of the first calibration step Enter the first calibration point with an empty tank 0 0 Gallons liters by pressing the Accept key The Current Point highlight will advance to the next point Tank Levels Calibration Only two settin
100. Maretron DSM250 NMEA 2000 Multi function Color Graphic Display User s Manual Revision 1 4 16a Copyright 2013 Maretron LLP All Rights Reserved Maretron LLP 9014 N 23 Ave 10 Phoenix AZ 85021 7850 http www maretron com Maretron Manual Part M001301 Revision 1 4 16a Page DSM250 User s Manual Revision History Original document Added sections on Alert and Anchor Watch and configuration of more devices 1 4 8 Added prohibition of red Loctite threadlocking compound and cleaning agents containing acetone Added new J2K100 configuration capabilities Added new ACM100 configuration capabilities Added information on configuring IPG100 Added information on configuring GPS200 Added new DST110 configuration capabilities 1 4 16 Added description of Electrical Distribution control and monitoring Added Fluid Flow category Added Switch Breaker display type Added Engine gt Trip Fuel Used parameter Added Vessel Data Recorder monitoring Added Airmar transducer configuration calibration Added DCR100 configuration Added FFM100 configuration Added FPM100 configuration Added NBE100 configuration Added VDR100 configuration Updated Supported Display Types in Technical Specifications 1 4 16a Corrected Page Number Issue Updated Received PGN List Corrected Description of DSM150 Running in Favorite Screens Mode Figure Added notes that zero re trigger time on an alert will disable re triggering Page ii Revis
101. N Enable Disable Restore Factory Defaults Power Scroll Scroll Up Down Figure 222 WSO100 Advanced Configuration Screen 6 30 1 1 Device Instance This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the unit You usually will not need to modify the default value of O unless you have multiple units on the network Device instance is always used in the Wind PGNs 6 30 1 2 Instance Humidity This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the humidity transmitted in PGN 130313 You usually will not need to modify the default value of O unless you have multiple humidity sensors on the network 6 30 1 3 Instance Pressure This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the air pressure transmitted in PGN 130314 You usually will not need to modify the default value of 0 unless you have multiple pressure sensors on the network 6 30 1 4 Instance Temperature This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the temperature transmitted in PGN 130312 You usually will not need to modify the default value of O unless you have multiple temperature sensors on the network Note that the TMP100 module also generates these PGNs 6 30 1 5 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the loc
102. NR Mask on aGbGi00 cece eeseeeeeeseeeceeeseeeseeeaeeeauss 119 Figure 117 GPS100 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen 120 Figure 118 Restoring Factory Defaults on the GPS100 20 0 0 ccc ccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeaeeeseesaess 121 Figure 119 Performing a Cold Start of the GbGiI00 121 Figure 120 Configuring GPS Operating Mode on a GbGI00 122 Pigure 12 1 COnnGuUrInGg SBAS ON a GPS LOO WEE 123 Figure 122 GPS200 Configuration Gcreen ENEE 124 Figure 123 GPS200 Advanced Configuration Gcreen 124 Figure 124 GPS200 NMEA 20007 PGN Enable Disable Screen 125 Figure 125 Restoring Factory Defaults on the GG 200 126 Figure 126 Performing a Cold Start of the GbG200 126 Figure 127 Configuring SBAS on aGbGZ00 127 Figure 128 IPG100 Configuration SCE EE 128 Figure 129 IPG100 Advanced Configuration Gcreen 128 Figure 130 IPG100 N2KServer Information Gcreen cece cece eecceeece cece eeaeeeaeeceeeceeeeeeeseeeseesaees 129 Figure 131 IP G100 Client List DISHA E 130 Figure 132 J2K100 Configuration Screen ccccceccceeccececeeeaeeeeeeceeeceeeceeeseeeseeeseeeseesseeseeeseeeaeesaees 132 Figure 133 J2K100 Advanced Configuration Gcreen 132 Figure 134 J2K100 J1939 Diagnostic Messages Confguraton 133 Figure 135 J2K100 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen 134 Figure 136 J2K100 Engine Instance Confguraton 135 Figure 137 J2K100 NMEA2000 Transmission Instance Configurati
103. PORT FUEL TEMP Flow Instance ei Flow Label PORT FUEL FLOW Volume Instance ei VOIR PORT FUEL VOLUME Figure 92 FFM100 Channel 0 Second Configuration Screen Differential Mode 6 12 4 1 1 Channel Supply Return You may select whether the Channel 0 fuel flow sensor is connected to the supply fuel line or the return fuel line 6 12 4 1 2Engine Instance Program this parameter to match the desired engine instance number of the flow rate and total fuel used for this channel You can program this parameter to any value between 0 and 252 Revision 1 4 16a Page 99 DSM250 User s Manual 6 12 4 1 3Engine Label Each channel has a text label you can set to identify the load controlled by that channel for example PORT ENGINE or COOLING WATER FLOW For each channel set this to a value which describes the flow being monitored so that you can easily identify it in display devices 6 12 4 1 4K Factor Program this parameter to match the K factor that appears on the flow sensor connected to this channel 6 12 4 1 5Data Damping Period You can configure a damping parameter to smooth the flow rate readings or make them more responsive The data damping is configurable between 0 2 25 0 seconds The default data damping period is 3 0 seconds 6 12 4 1 6Reset Total Volume Recorded The FFM100 maintains the total volume recorded in EEPROM so that it is maintained across power cycles Select this menu entry to reset the total vol
104. SH HWE SW 23 Airmar DST200 BEH H 127 i 1003 10 Clear Speed Calibration Clear Speed Calibration Clear Temperature Offset 0 0 F Temperature Calibration Transducer Depth Offset 2 0 ft Trip Log 0 0 nm Reset Figure 33 Airmar Depth Speed Temperature Transducer Configuration Screen 6 1 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Revision 1 4 16a Page 47 DSM250 User s Manual Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HWE SW 23 Airmar DST200 BEH H 127 i 1003 10 Advanced Configuration Device Instance E Installation Description NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Figure 34 Airmar Transducer Advanced Configuration Screen 6 1 2 Device Instance This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the unit You usually will not need to modify the default value of 0 unless you have multiple units on the network 6 1 3 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later See
105. Tank Capacity Change Confirmation Screen 6 24 4 Tank Levels Calibration In order for the TLM100 to indicate an accurate tank level it must know the geometry of the tank There are two methods of calibrating the tank level sender e Custom Calibration use for non rectangular tanks also most accurate in any case but requires more effort e Rectangular Tank By inputting some dimensions of a rectangular tank the TLM100 is able to interpolate the volume of liquid from the distance to the surface Page 178 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 6 24 4 1 Custom Calibration The Custom Calibration setting will provide the most accurate tank level readings under any circumstances but it requires that you go through a process in which you gradually fill the tank stopping periodically to input the current fluid level The TLM100 will measure the distance to the surface at each point and create a custom calibration map which relates the fluid levels to the volume in the tank Figure 186 below shows a screenshot of the DSM250 with the Custom Calibration option highlighted Custom calibration is necessary for non rectangular tanks To perform custom calibration of the tank level sender use the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys to move the highlighted cursor over the Custom Calibration menu item Then press the Enter key to confirm your selection and begin the calibration process Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufactu
106. The operating mode of each channel may be set to either DCR DC Relay in which case the state of the channel is controlled by Circuit Breaker Switch controls in N2KView or Switch Breaker favorite screens in the DSM150 DSM250 displays This section of the manual assumes the operating mode has been set to ALM 6 6 4 2 3 ALM Instance This entry allows you to program the instance number for the ALM function You may use a value between 0 and 15 This instance number is used by the DSM150 DS250 or N2KView when selecting annunciators to sound when programming an alert 6 6 4 2 4 Test Annunciator Select this entry to verify functionality of the channel in ALM mode This will cause the annunciator to sound or light briefly 6 7 Maretron DSM200 Configuration You can use the DSM250 to configure other remotely located DSM200 units by using the Remote DSM200 configuration menu shown in Figure 62 below This describes the configuration of the Maretron DSM200 firmware version 1 10 There is one configurable item for the remote DSM200 configuration and that is Remote Device Selection Page 72 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HW D Maretron DSM200 1100005 12 Remote Device Selection Figure 62 DSM200 Remote Configuration Screen 6 7 1 Remote Device Selection A DSM250 unit can be used to configure a remote DSM200 to set which NMEA 2000 devices
107. UE Power Cancel Figure 38 Resetting the Airmar Speed Sensor Trip Distance Log Revision 1 4 16a Page 51 DSM250 User s Manual 6 2 Bennett EP 30 NMEA1 Trim Tabs Configuration This describes the configuration of the Bennett EP 30 trim tabs firmware version 1 0 7 NMEA1 NMEA 2000 Trim Tab Indicator Kit The EP 30 configuration menu is shown below in Figure 39 below and currently has the single entry Trim Tabs Calibration Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HW SW 00 Lowrance EP Trim Ta _ 10 0 10 7 Trim Tabs Calibration Power Figure 39 EP 30 Trim Tabs Configuration Screen 6 2 1 Trim Tabs Calibration The Bennett EP 30 NMEA1 trim tabs calibration opening screen is shown in Figure 40 below The first step in calibration is to move both trim tabs to the full up position and then press the Accept ch key to begin the calibration process You may also elect to abort the calibration process at this time by pressing the Abort key Trim Tabs Calibration 1 Press lt Abort gt to cancel calibration and revert to old calibration data 2 Raise both trim tabs to full up position 3 Press lt Accept gt to begin calibration and follow the instruction in the pop up windows Power Accept Figure 40 EP 30 Trim Tabs Calibration Opening Screen Page 52 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron After you press the Acc
108. Utility Phase C Frequency displays frequency of the AC power on phase C of the utility Phase C L N Voltage displays phase C Line to Neutral RMS voltage of the Utility Phase CA L L Voltage displays phase C Line to phase A Line RMS voltage of the Utility Phase C Real Power displays real power output on phase C of the Utility Phase C Reactive Power displays reactive power output on phase C of the Utility Phase C Apparent Power displays apparent power output on phase C of the Utility Phase C Power Factor displays power factor of phase C of the Utility Revision 1 4 16a Page 13 DSM250 User s Manual 4 2 4 Anchor Watch The DSM250 provides a graphical display of the Anchor Alert section 8 3 7 9 parameters When the vessel is anchored the position of vessel at the point of dropping the anchor is entered in to the Anchor Alert plus the maximum distance that the boat can drift from that position normally a little more than the amount of Anchor Chain that you have let out If the boat moves beyond that radius an Alert is triggered The Anchor Watch display shows the last reported position of the vessel relative to the reported Anchor Drop position and the radius of the alert see section 7 1 for more details on the display 4 2 5 DC The DSM250 supports the display of information for up to 64 DC sources including alternators batteries solar cells wind generators etc with special parameters for batteries Le State of
109. W 49 Maretron SC 0s 1742020 Advanced Configuration NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable enee Heading Magnetic Variation Scroll Scroll Up Down Figure 169 SSC200 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen You can enable or disable specific transmissions by scrolling or through the different transmitted messages and pressing the Enter key on the message to be configured Select whether you want the message to be transmitted On or disabled Off using the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 22 1 5 Restore Factory Defaults This option restores all settings on the device to their factory default state 6 22 2 Installation Offset Calibration The installation offset e misalignment of installed SSC200 with vessel s center line may be calibrated using the Maretron DSM250 display While executing Installation Offset Calibration the vessel must stay still with no pitch and roll because SSC200 will also calibrate pitch and roll at this time Once the compass is installed point the vessel at a known heading and then select the compass from the Device Configuration menu Scroll down the menu items to the line entitled Installation Offset Calibration and press enter which takes you to the screen shown in Figure 170 Revision 1 4 16a Page 157 DSM250 User s Manual Installation Offset Calibration 1 Select Current Heading
110. a to be displayed in each part of the screen Selecting the data to be displayed is a two step process First press the Enter key and select the category of data to be displayed Favorite Screens Setup Favorite 1 Favorite Mode Auto Manual Format Full Window Auto Change Interval 5 Seconds Window 1 Data MGE Apparent Direction Type Numeric Instance 0 Title Default Wind ai Apparent Direction Figure 29 Selecting the Data Category Once you select the category press the Enter key to accept this category at which time the highlight will move to the data type field where you can display the particular data type from the selected category to be displayed as shown in Figure 30 Favorite Screens Setup Favorite 1 Favorite Mode Auto Manual Format Full Window Auto Change Interval 5 Seconds Window 1 Data Wind VEL tary Type Numeric Instance 0 Title Default Wind ai Apparent Direction Figure 30 Selecting the Data to be displayed 5 2 6 4 1 Type Once you have selected the particular data item to be displayed you may select the type of data display to be used for that data item The available display types vary depending upon the selected data item but may include any of the following see Section 7 for descriptions of the available display types e Anchor Watch See Section 7 1 on page 198 Revision 1 4 16a Page 39 DSM250 User s Manual Compass Rose see Section 7 2
111. able Alert can be used in conjunction with other alert types when you need to know if a particular parameter is no longer being received on the network or is flagged as not available by the transmitting device For instance you probably would want to use a Data Unavailable Alert for the Depth gt Current Depth parameter since it would be advisable to know if the depth sounder were to stop transmitting a depth reading or became unable to determine the depth due to fouling or some other reason On the other hand if you were to set a Data Unavailable Alert on Engine gt Engine Page 220 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Water Temperature parameter you would then get an alert every time the ignition was switched off and the engine s ECU stopped transmitting data 8 3 7 3 1 Trigger Configuration Alert Detail Alert s Pending 4 Instance Any Description Location Trigger Configuration Trigger Type aQData Unavailable Alert Re trigger Period 1 00 min sec Alert Set Delay 0 10 min sec Alert Clear Delay 0 10 min sec Local Audible Enable Tone Continuous Remote Annunciator s Operating Mode_Moored Enable Figure 260 Trigger Configuration Data Unavailable Alert Re trigger Period When you accept an alert it will change to the Accepted state and annunciators that are sounding for that alert will stop sounding If the condition which caused the alert remains true after the amount of time in this
112. acturer Model Su HN SW 9 Maretron FPM SN 10009 10 10 1 Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 9 Device Label ENGINE ROOM FPM100 Figure 98 FPM100 Configuration Screen 6 13 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Revision 1 4 16a Page 107 DSM250 User s Manual Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNF HW 38 Maretron FPH SN ot 10 Advanced Configuration Device Instance F Installation Description NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Restore Factory Defaults Figure 99 FPM100 Advanced Configuration Screen 6 13 1 1 Device Instance This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the unit You usually will not need to modify the default value of O unless you have multiple units on the network 6 13 1 2 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later 6 13 1 3 NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable The FPM100 Fluid Pressure Mod
113. acturer of the device The Model column displays the model number of the device The SN column displays the serial number of the device so that any of two or more devices of the same manufacturer and model number may be distinguished from one another The Stat column indicates whether the device is currently connected to the bus and is responding to queries Online or has been disconnected from the bus has lost power or for some other reason is not responding to queries Offline The Disp column indicates whether data from that particular device is accepted for display by the USB100 On or that the USB100 ignores data transmitted by this device Off By scrolling to the device and pressing the Enter key you may then use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys to toggle the Display status for this particular device Once you Page 188 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron are satisfied with the state of the Display setting press the Enter key to accept the setting The USB100 will retain information on devices that have been removed from the bus or powered down Offline so that when they are placed back on the bus they will assume their prior Display setting 6 29 Maretron VDR100 Configuration The DSM250 is capable of performing configuration of the VDR100 Vessel Data Recorder This describes the configuration of the Maretron VDR100 firmware version 1
114. aea pIE RSE 202 Figure 240 Configuration of Rolling Road Display cccccccceccceeeseeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeceeeseeeseeeseeeaeeeaues 203 Figure 241 Rolling Road Display 204 Figure 242 Line Graph Display 5 nsccicdniios cicdesioscwiedsinetoinbnisied asic nisiodassnsiediecieainaedyedndadieasdndsaieasanasangedauedingsdalnenoess 204 FIOO 243 Wealer DISDIAY EE 205 Figure 244 de lee ERIC EE 206 Figure 245 Moon Phase Display saisiswrewssiswssinwssiennunweaswesnwestusdenedausadwonseendabsannsieboewerduaeensiebvanetioeekee ioe 206 Sieft EN Hell VAIS DIS Payer E E E E EE 207 Figure 247 Swing Meter Display 207 Figure 248 Tank Gauge Display ccccccccccceccceeeeeeceeeceeece ees eeeeeceeeseeeseessueeeeeseeeseeseessueseeseeesanes 208 Figure 249 Configuration of Switch Breaker Display 208 Figure 250 Selection of an Individual Switch Breaker ccccccceecceecceeeseeeeeeeeeeceeeceeeseeeseeeseeeaess 209 Figure 251 Configuration of an Individual Switch Breaker annannennunnnnnennnnnnnnnrnnrnrrrrrrrrnrrnrnnrnne 209 Figure 252 Favorite Screen Showing Highlighted Switch Breaker aanannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnn 211 ROWO Zo ICKL LOIS I AY e E E E E ESEE 212 Figure 254 Adding a New Alert WEE 214 Figure 255 Part of the Alert Edit Gcreen ENEE 215 Figure 256 High Alert Parameters A 217 Figure 257 Trigger Configuration High Alert 218 Figure 258 Low Al
115. age will be transmitted at the interval specified Select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key Notice that by default the old Environmental Parameters message PGN 130310 is disabled while the new Environmental Parameters message PGN 130311 is enabled The reason for this is that the old message has been discontinued by the National Marine Electronics Association NMEA in favor of the new message If you find that a particular display is not showing particular information e temperature humidity or barometric pressure go ahead and enable the old message to see if data then becomes available 6 30 1 7 Restore Factory Defaults This option restores all settings on the device to their factory default state 6 30 2 Device Label A device label may be assigned to the WSO100 as an aid to identifying the device over the network See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value Page 192 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNe HWe SWe 8A Maretron W500 TAH 20 20 2 Advanced Configuration Device Label GEINA Installation Offset Calibration Wind Data Damping Period 4 0s Barometric Pressure 29 80 Inches Mercury Outside Humidity 13 Percent Outside Temperature 80 F Figure 224 WSO100 Device Label Menu 6 30 3 Installation Offset Calibration The WSO100 comes from the factory with a preset orientation so
116. am a positive value equal to the distance from the waterline to the depth of the DST110 The DSM250 will then add the measured depth of the water as seen by the DST110 to the programmed offset value to produce the total water depth If you are interested in the depth of water beneath the keel then you should program a negative value equal to the distance between the DST110 and the bottom of the keel The DSM will then subtract the programmed offset from the measured depth of the water as seen by the DST110 showing you the depth of water beneath the keel You program the transducer depth offset by pressing the Enter key with the Transducer Depth Offset menu item selected which results in the screen shown in Figure 78 Revision 1 4 16a Page 89 DSM250 User s Manual Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SHY HW SW Zi Maretron DST 10 E D235 511003 10 Advanced Configuration Clear Speed Calibration Clear speed Calibration Clear Temperature Offset 0 0 F Temperature Calibration Transducer Depth Offset BGR Trip Log 0 0 nm Reset Power Cancel Increase Decrease Accept Figure 85 Setting the Transducer Depth Offset in a DST110 With the offset value highlighted you can change the offset by using the Increase and Decrease keys or Once you have selected the desired offset push the Enter key to complete the transducer depth offset calibration This procedure actually progra
117. ameter is set to Yes you do not need to configure this parameter If the DHCP parameter is set to No you will need to configure this parameter 6 16 6 Subnet Mask This is a mask used to divide an IP Address into subnets Basically it tells the computer how much of the IP Address defines the network and how much may be used by computers on the network For most networks the first three parts of the IP address define the network Le every computer on the network must have the same values and the last part defines the computer i e every computer on the network must have a different value Where the value 255 appears in the subnet mask the values define the network and must be the same The most common value Is 255 255 255 0 If the DHCP parameter is set to Yes you do not need to configure this parameter If the DHCP parameter is set to No you will need to configure this parameter 6 16 7 Default Gateway This is the IP address of the router If the DHCP parameter is set to Yes you do not need to configure this parameter If the DHCP parameter is set to No you will need to configure this parameter 6 16 8 Default DNS This is the IP address of a computer on the Internet that can identify and locate computer systems and resources on the internet In most cases this should not be required by the IPG100 and may be left blank If the DHCP parameter is set to No
118. ank Levels Calibration Capacity Estimation 0 00n0nnannannennennnnnnnnnnnnrnrnnrerrrnrrnrnnnnn 169 Figure 188 Empty Level Calibration ccccccccccecccececeeeeeeceeeceeeceeeceeseeseueceeeceeseeeseeseeeseeeseeesages 169 Figure 189 Intermediate Level Calibration ccccccccccecccecceeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeseeceeeceeeseeeseessueeeeseeesaees 170 Figure 190 Full Level Calibration 2 2 0 0 cccccccccccsecceeeceeeeeeceeesaeecaeecaeessesaueceeeseesaeesaessuesseessaesages 170 Revision 1 4 16a Page xili DSM250 User s Manual Figure 191 Custom Tank Level Calibration Confirmation Screen sansannennnnnnnnnnnnnnrenernnnnnnnnnn 171 Figure 192 American Standard Sender Calbraton 171 Figure 193 European Standard Sender Calibration cccccccccceceecceeeceeeeeeseeeseeceeeceeeeaeeaeesaues 172 Figure 194 Configuring the Tank Number 172 Figure 195 Configuring the Tank Type scnasena E a aS 173 Figure 196 Configuring the Operating Mode 0 n0an0nnannannannnnnanonnnnnnnnnnrnrnrrnnrrnrnnrnnrsrrnrrnrrnrrnrnnenne 174 Figure 197 Configuring the to Sender GaugeHesistoance 174 Figure 198 Configuring the to Sender Gauge Resistance ccc ceccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeseeeaeeeaeeeaees 175 Figure 199 TLM100 Configuration Gcreen 176 Figure 200 TLM100 Advanced Configuration Screen cccccccceccceecsecceeeceeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeaeesaess 176 Figure 201 TLM1
119. ansmission of the Rudder message by pressing the Enter key on the message to be configured Options are e Disable The status message will not be transmitted e Default The status message will be transmitted at its default NUEA2000 rate Select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 19 1 4 Restore Factory Defaults This option restores all settings on the device to their factory default state 6 19 2 Label A label may be assigned to the RAA100 as an aid to identifying the device over the network Typically this label will describe the rudder to which the RAA100 is connected e g Port Rudder Page 140 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNF HWe SW 62 Maretron RAA 90 T5991 10 14 5 Advanced Configuration Label uk Rudder Angle Calibration Rudder Number 1 Dual rudder starboard Operating Mode NMEA2000 amp Analog Gauge Gauge Resistance to sender 135 Gauge Resistance to sender 199 Figure 145 RAA100 Label Configuration See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value 6 19 3 Rudder Angle Calibration In order for the RAA100 to indicate an accurate rudder angle it must Know how the resistance of the resistive rudder angle sender corresponds to the rudder angle The following screen will be displayed Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SHY HWE SW D I Mar
120. arameters which can vary depending on the type of alert chosen These parameters are 8 3 1 Enable Disable Control This allows individual alerts to be enabled or disabled The decision to disable an Alert must be made very carefully as it nullifies the purpose for having alerts The options here are e Enable e Disable The desired option is selected using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons 8 3 2 Alert Type This allows the selection of the type of Alert See paragraph 0 The options here are e Alarm e Warning The desired option is selected using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons 8 3 3 Priority Each Alarm has a unique priority ranging from O highest priority to 3999 lowest priority Each Warning has a unique priority in the same range however the entire set of Warning Priorities is considered lower than the Alarm Priorities No two Alarms Warnings may have the same priorities and when scrolling through the priorities numbers that are already in use will be omitted from the list The desired option is selected using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons Revision 1 4 16a Page 215 DSM250 User s Manual 8 3 4 Trigger Source This allows the selection of the parameter to be monitored The parameters are laid out as per section 4 2 The trigger source is specified in three parts which when combined will uniquely identify a single parameter on the bus 8 3 4 1 Type The Type corresponds to the category of data
121. are selected for display on the remote DSM200 unit In this manner multiple devices of the same type may be used on a NMEA 2000 network in a fail safe configuration For example a certain compass unit out of several may be selected for display on the remote DSM200 The Remote Device Selection menu for an example network configuration can be seen in Figure 63 below WARNING Do not select multiple devices of the same type for display This will result in multiple and possibly conflicting readings Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNF HW SW 11 Maretron DSMA00 1400105 12 1 15 0 Remote Device Selection NA Manuf Model SHN Stt Disp EET T On 49 Maretron SSCA 1 Ou n H Maretron DSM 109000 Onl n 20 Maretron USB 100 160111 nL n 80 Maretron WS0 100 ANGI Onl On Power Figure 63 DSM200 Remote Device Selection Screen The NA column of the menu displays the node address the device is using The Manuf column of the menu displays the manufacturer of the device The Model column displays the model number of the device The SN column displays the serial number of the device so that any of two or more devices of the same manufacturer and model number may be distinguished from one another Revision 1 4 16a Page 73 DSM250 User s Manual The Stat column indicates whether the device is currently connected to the bus and is responding to queries Online
122. at to the programmed route Distance To Waypoint displays the distance to the destination waypoint Est Time of Arrival displays the Estimated Time of Arrival at the waypoint Lat Lon displays the current latitude and longitude of the vessel Rolling Road displays navigation information for the current leg of the route Set Drift displays the direction set and speed drift of the water current Speed Over Ground displays current Speed over Ground relative to the earth not the water Time To Go displays the estimated Time to Go until arrival at the waypoint VMG to Waypoint displays the Velocity Made Good that is the speed at which the distance to the waypoint is decreasing Waypoint Number this displays the number of the destination waypoint 4 2 17 Rudder The DSM250 supports the display of information for up to four rudders Rudder Angle amp Order displays the angle of the vessel s rudder as indicated by the rudder sensor as well as the angle to which the rudder has been commanded by an autopilot or steering device 4 2 18 Pressure Vacuum Barometric displays the current atmospheric barometric pressure Compressed Air displays the current pressure of compressed air Engine Boost displays the boost pressure of a supercharger or turbocharger Engine Coolant displays the coolant pressure for an engine Engine Fuel displays the fuel pressure for an engine Engine Oil displays the oil press
123. ation in which it was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later 6 30 1 6 NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable The WSO100 Ultrasonic Wind and Weather Station transmits a number of NUEA2000 PGNs which can be turned on or turned off by the DSM250 display For the vast majority of installations the factory setting is appropriate but if it becomes necessary to disable one of the transmitted messages Revision 1 4 16a Page 191 DSM250 User s Manual from the WSO100 for instance if you have a separate thermometer humidity sensor barometer on the network it is possible to do so with the DSM250 Pressing the Enter key with NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable menu item selected causes the DSM250 to display the following screen Figure 223 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model sH HW SW BA Maretron WSON M44 20 207 Advanced Configuration NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable LH Wind Data On DOUM Environmental Parameters On DU Environmental Parameters On THOT Temperature On THOT Humidity On TH Actual Pressure On Figure 223 WSO100 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen You can enable or disable the transmission of the messages by pressing the Enter key on the message to be configured Options are Disable The message will not be transmitted Default The message will be transmitted at its default NUEA2000 rate 0 5s 5 0s The mess
124. ation or placement of the DST100 within the hull The DSM250 can correct for these inaccuracies using the speed calibration procedure You calibrate the DSM250 for the DST100 STW by pressing the Enter key with the Speed Calibration menu item selected which results in the screen shown in Figure 77 speed Calibration 1 Select Speed Through Water 2 Press lt Accept gt to complete Power Abort Increase Decrease Accept Figure 77 Calibrating the DSM250 for DST100 Speed through Water The speed calibration screen shown in Figure 77 indicates the STW as measured by the DST100 which can be changed to the actual STW by following these steps First pick a speed where you are most concerned with the best accuracy Next bring the boat up to the desired speed using some other source perhaps the GPS speed over ground SOG Remember that the SOG does not necessary reflect the STW because of currents and drift due to winds so you should do this in an area where you are sure there are no currents and calm winds Finally use the Increase and Decrease keys to adjust the display value until it matches the known speed of the boat Press the Accept key to accept the value when you are satisfied If you do not wish to perform installation offset calibration at this time press the Abort key and the speed calibration will not Revision 1 4 16a Page 83 DSM250 User s Manual be altered The speed calibration
125. ature Label Lobby Power Cancel Increase Decrease Accept Figure 215 TMP100 Channel Configuration Screen 6 27 2 1 Instance The Data Instance of the Temperature as sent in PGNs 130311 130312 and 130823 is set in this field Use the Increase and Decrease buttons to select the correct instance number and the press the Enter button to store it 6 27 2 2 Source In the NUEA2000 PGNs each temperature is associated with a source type Possible values are Bait Well Temperature Engine Room Temperature Exhaust Gas Temperature Freezer Temperature Heating System Temperature Inside Temperature Live Well Temperature Main Cabin Temperature Outside Temperature Refrigeration Temperature Sea Temperature User Defined Temperature 129 4 144 Use this when none of the above options are suitable Use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons to select the correct source and the press the Enter button to store it 6 27 2 3 Label A label may be assigned to each channel of the TMP100 as an aid to identifying the temperature that is being displayed Typically this label will describe the function or location of the temperature sensor 6 27 3 Device Label A label may be assigned to the TMP100 as an aid to identifying the device over the network Typically this label will describe the location of the TMP100 Page 186 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 6 28 Maretron USB100 Configuration Maretron USB100 gateways on the network may be con
126. auses the screen shown in Figure 120 to be displayed Revision 1 4 16a Page 121 DSM250 User s Manual Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNe HW SW 21 Maretron GPS 211 d 20 1 Advanced Configuration Cold start GPS Engine GPS Mode ETT Label GPS211 JP15 SHIELD SBAS WAAS EGNOS MSAS Enable Power Scroll Scroll Up Down Figure 120 Configuring GPS Operating Mode on a GPS100 The allowable options for GPS Mode are 1D which allows the GPS to report data when only a one dimensional fix time only or better is obtained 2D which allows the GPS to report data only when a two dimensional fix or better is obtained 3D which allows the GPS to report data only when a three dimensional fix or better is obtained or Auto default which allows the GPS to report any available data regardless of the quality of the fix 6 14 4 Device Label A label may be assigned to the GPS100 as an aid to identifying the device over the network Typically this would describe the location of the GPS on the vessel See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value 6 14 5 SBAS WAAS Enable Disable The DSM250 is capable of enabling or disabling the SBAS WAAS function on a Maretron GPS Antenna Receiver GPS100 You can change this setting by pressing the Enter key with the SBAS WAAS EGNOS MSAS menu item selected which causes the screen shown in Figure 121 to be displa
127. backward compatibility Revision 1 4 16a Page 27 DSM250 User s Manual Power The NA column of the menu displays the node address the device is using Configuration Device Selection WA Manufacturer Model SNF Status Display ee laretron TER WO AO Offline Ou 21 Maretron GPS 400 140001 Online On 62 Maretron SSC AN 1 Online On 03 Maretron DST RN 10003 Online On 4 Maretron USE 100 160004 Online On D Maretron DSM200 100005 Online On AG Maretron JK 100 t4008 Online On 6 Marton WSOW0 200006 Online On OF Maretron EMS 100 TAM Online On B9 Maretron TLA W0 To Online On Figure 12 E Device Selection Screen The Manufacturer column of the menu displays the manufacturer of the device The Model column displays the model number of the device The SN column displays the serial number of the device so that any of two or more devices of the same manufacturer and model number may be distinguished from one another The Status column indicates whether the device is currently connected to the bus and is responding to queries Online or has been disconnected from the bus has lost power or for some other reason is not responding to queries Offline The Display column indicates whether data from that particular device is accepted for display by the DSM250 On or that the DSM250 ignores data transmitted by this device Off By scrolling to the
128. bal Alarm Lal on Yes Global Alarm Yes Global Alarm Pei web ee Figure 273 Deleting Alert List Scroll up and down using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons until the alert that must be deleted is highlighted and press the Enter button A confirmation message is displayed Alert Setup Delete Alert Priorty Enab Type Description Are you sure you want to delete selected alert Yes Global Alarm Cancel Accept Figure 274 Deleting an Alert Confirmation Press the Accept button to delete the Alert or the Cancel button to return to the previous screen without deleting the Alert 8 5 Editing an Alert From the Alert Setup Menu selected the menu item Edit Alert Revision 1 4 16a Page 233 DSM250 User s Manual Alert Setup Add New Alert Delete Alert Operating Mode Disable Advanced Configuration Restore Factory Defaults Figure 275 Editing an Alert This brings up the list of Alerts managed by the DSM2590 Alert Setup Edit Alert Priorty Enab Type Description 0 Yes Global Alarm 1 Yes Global Alarm Yes Global Alarm 3 Yes Global Alarm Anchor Watch 4 Yes Global Alarm 4 Yes Global Alarm Yes Global Alarm 9 Yes Global Alarm Lal on 11 Yes Global Alarm 21 Yes Global Alarm Figure 276 Editing an Alert Alert List The following information is shown for each alert that is in the system Priority The priority of the Alert see 8 3 3 Enab
129. ble Screen 87 Figure 83 Calibrating the DST110 Speed 0 ec cccceccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeeeeseeeseeeseeseeesas 88 Figure 84 DST110 Water Temperature Calibration Screen c cccccccceccceeceeeeeeeseeeceeseeeaeesseeeeeaes 89 Figure 85 Setting the Transducer Depth Offset in a DST 90 Figure 86 Resetting the DST110 Trip Distance Log 90 Figure 87 EMS100 Configuration Screen cccccceccecccecccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeceeeseeseeeseeseeeseeseeegeeeseeeas 91 Figure 88 FFM100 Configuration Gcreen 96 Figure 89 FFM100 Advanced Configuration cccccccceccsecceecceeececeseeeeeeeeeeceeeseeeseeeseeeseeseeeseeeseeeges 96 Figure 90 FFM100 NMEA PGN Enable Disable Gcreen 98 Figure 91 FFM100 Channel 0 First Configuration Screen Differential Mode 99 Figure 92 FFM100 Channel 0 Second Configuration Screen Differential Mode 99 Figure 93 FFM100 Channel 0 First Configuration Screen Two Independent Sensors Mode 101 Figure 94 FFM100 Channel 0 Second Configuration Screen Two Independent Sensors Mode 107 Revision 1 4 16a Page xi DSM250 User s Manual Figure 95 FFM100 Channel 1 Configuration Screen Differential Mode 104 Figure 96 FFM100 Channel 1 First Configuration Screen Two Independent Sensors Mode 105 Figure 97 FFM100 Channel 1 Second Configuration Screen Two Independent Sensors Mode 105 Figure 98 FPM100 Configuration Scree
130. bottom left hand corner of the screen shows two important parameters 1 it indicates which favorite screen is being displayed in this case Favorite 5 and 2 it indicates that the DSM250 is currently operating in the Auto mode Manual would appear in place of Auto if the DSM250 was operating in Manual mode Revision 1 4 16a Page 25 DSM250 User s Manual 5 2 Menu Mode The menu mode is entered while viewing favorite screens by pressing the Enter key In menu mode the DSM250 may be configured by scrolling up and down the menu and selecting one of the submenus found there The DSM250 Main Menu can be seen in Figure 10 below Favorite Screens Mode Manual Favorite Screens Setup Units Figure 10 Main Menu The menu has the following structure Alert Setup 5 2 1 Add New Alert 8 2 Delete Alert 8 4 Edit Alert 8 5 Operating Mode 8 6 Advanced Configuration 8 7 Restore Factory Defaults 8 8 Alert Status 5 2 2 Configuration Device Configuration 5 2 3 1 Device Selection 5 2 3 2 Display Settings Advanced Configuration 5 2 4 1 Advanced Information 5 2 4 2 Backlight 5 2 4 3 Color Setup 5 2 4 4 Demo Mode 5 2 4 5 Keypad Beep 5 2 4 6 Label 5 2 4 7 Language 5 2 4 8 software Version 5 2 4 9 Favorite Screens Mode 5 2 4 7 Favorite Screens Setup 5 2 6 Units 5 2 6 4 2 Page 26 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 5 2 1 Alert Setup
131. button while this item is highlighted The operator will be prompted to confirm this action before it taken Page 236 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Alert Setup Add New Alert Are you sure you want to restore factory defaults Power Cancel Accept Figure 279 Restore Factory Defaults Confirmation Revision 1 4 16a Page 237 DSM250 User s Manual 9 Maintenance Regular maintenance is important to ensure continued proper operation of the Maretron DSM250 Perform the following tasks periodically e Clean the unit with a soft cloth Do not use chemical cleaners as they may remove paint or markings or may corrode the DSM250 enclosure or seals Do not use any cleaners containing acetone as they will deteriorate the plastic enclosure e Ensure that the unit is mounted securely and cannot be moved relative to the mounting surface If the unit is loose tighten the mounting screws e Check the security of the cable connected to the NMEA 20007 interface and tighten if necessary Page 238 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 10 Troubleshooting If you notice unexpected operation of the Maretron DSM250 follow the troubleshooting procedures in this section to remedy simple problems Symptom Troubleshooting Procedure No activity on the display Check the connection to the NMEA 2000 and connector and tighten if necessary Ensure that power is supplied to the connected NMEA 20007 cable Use the N2KAnalyzer tool to verify whether
132. calibrate the DST110 STW by pressing the Enter key with the Speed Calibration menu item selected which results in the screen shown in Figure 77 speed Calibration 1 Select Speed Through Water 2 Press lt Accept gt to complete Power Abort Increase Decrease Accept Figure 83 Calibrating the DST110 Speed The speed calibration screen shown in Figure 77 indicates the STW as measured by the DST110 which can be changed to the transmitted STW by following these steps First pick a speed where you are most concerned with the best accuracy Next bring the boat up to the desired speed using some other source perhaps the GPS speed over ground SOG Remember that the SOG does not necessary reflect the STW because of currents and drift due to winds so you should do this in an area where you are sure there are no currents and calm winds Finally use the Increase and Decrease keys to adjust the display value until it matches the known speed of the boat Press the Accept key to accept the value when you are satisfied If you do not wish to perform speed calibration at this time press the Abort key and the speed calibration will not be altered 6 10 4 Clear Temperature Offset The Clear Temperature Offset configuration parameter shows you the currently used temperature correction offset All measured sea temperature readings have this value added to them before being transmitted over the NMEA 2000 network
133. ce eeeceeeceeeseeaeeceeeceeeseeeseeeseesseeseeeseeeseeeaes 29 Figure 14 DSM250 Advanced Configuration ccccccccceeeceseceeecececeeeeeeseeeceesaeeseeseeesaeeseeeseeeseeeaes 29 Figure 15 DSM250 Primary Device Gelechon 30 Figure 16 DSM250 Advanced Information Gcreen 31 FIgUFe 17 Bus Status RUE 31 PIQUE 16 BaCkKliGnt UE 32 Figure 19 Color Palette Selection Sere EE 33 Figure 20 Color Palette Configuration Gcreen 33 Figure 21 Setting the DEMO Mode ccc ccc secs ececeeceeeceeece ceca eeeeeseeeceeesaeesaeeseesseesaeeseeeseesseeeneeees 34 Figure 22 Setting the Keyboard Beep COpton cc cccccccceccceeceeeceeeceeseeeceeeaeeseesaeeeeesaeeseeeseeeseeeaes 35 Fige 29 Edno Ahe DSMZ50 babel EE 35 Figure 24 Setting the Favorite Screens Mode 36 Figure 25 Favorite Screens SelUP S Cre EE 36 Figure 26 Favorite Screen En 37 Figure 27 Setting the Favorite Screen Format ccccccccsccceccceeceeeseeeceeceeeseeseeseeeseeseeeseeeseeeseeeas 38 Figure 28 Setting the Auto Change Interval cccccccccccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeseeeseeeseeeseeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeees 38 Figure 29 Selecting the Data Category cccccecccccceecceecceeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseesseeeeeeteeeseeeseeegeees 39 Figure 30 Selecting the Datatobedeplaved cc cccccccceccseeceeeceeeseecaeeseeceeceeeseesaueseeeseeeseeeaes 39 Figure 9S D SIMZ5O0 UINIES MENU EE 41 Figure 32 Device Configuration Gcreen ara a a 45 F
134. cemaker related NMEA 2000 messages In order to configure this parameters use the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys to move the highlighted cursor to the AC Icemaker menu item Then press the Enter key to move the highlight to the numeric value on the right as shown in Figure 138 below Because only one such mapping can take place each air conditioner or icemaker on the J1939 network must have its own J2K100 Gateway The J1939 Source Address see section 6 17 4 identifies the air conditioner or icemaker on the CAN network the AC Icemaker Instance indentifies the air conditioner or icemaker to the NMEA2000 network Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model sH HW SW AS Maretron JK 1240008 10 10 11 Advanced Configuration Device Label NMEA2000 Instance Engine Transmission ACIlcemaker G J1939 Source Address Refresh J1939 source address list JE Sp None Power Cancel Increase Decrease Accept Figure 138 J2K100 NMEA2000 AC Icemaker Instance Configuration Use the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys to change the value to the desired value you wish and then press the Enter key to accept the value and store it within the J2K100 6 17 6 J1939 Source Address Configuration A J1939 engine genset and transmission has its own source address on the J1939 network which is different from NMEA 2000 addresses The J2K100 is capable of serving as a gateway between a si
135. culate engine RPM Use this setting to program the EMS100 with the number of flywheel teeth or alternator pulses per revolution for the engine to which the EMS100 is connected Valid options are e Q 400 pulses per revolution Select the required option using the Increase and Decrease keys followed by the Enter key Revision 1 4 16a Page 95 DSM250 User s Manual 6 12 Maretron FFM100 Configuration The DSM250 is capable of configuring the Maretron FFM100 Fluid Flow Monitor This describes the configuration of the Maretron FFM100 firmware version 1 1 1 2 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HWt SWE 69 Maretron FFH 0 1679999 10 1121 Device Label PORT ENGINE FUEL FLOW INTERFACE Operating Mode Differential Channel ei Channel 1 Figure 88 FFM100 Configuration Screen 6 12 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model Sg HW SWE 69 Maretron FFI 0 DIRK 10 1121 Advanced Configuration Device Instance ei Channel 0 Normal Installation Channel 1 Normal Installation Channel 0 Allow negative flow h r Channel 1 Allow negative flow Yes Differential Mode Allow negative flow No Installation Description
136. cupying the upper left hand corner of the screen the second occupying the upper right hand corner of the screen the third occupying the lower left hand corner of the screen and the fourth occupying the lower right hand corner of the screen Favorite Screens Setup Favorite 1 1 Ei Favorite Mode Auto Manual EA Format ETELA Auto Change Interval 5 Seconds Window 1 Data Fuel Management Total Fuel Consumption Type Numeric GPS Instance 0 Title Default Total Fuel Consumption Window 2 Data AC Bus Average Frequency Type Numeric Figure 27 Setting the Favorite Screen Format 5 2 6 3 Auto Change Interval In Auto mode this parameter determines the amount of time this favorite screen is displayed before the DSM250 automatically cycles to the next higher numbered favorite screen in the auto mode This parameter is programmable to anywhere between 1 second and 180 seconds Favorite Screens Setup Favorite 1 ole Favorite Mode Auto Manual EA Format 4 Quarters Auto Change Interval ERIM Window 1 Data Fuel Management Total Fuel Consumption Type Numeric GPS Instance 4 Title Default Total Fuel Consumption Window 2 Data AC Bus Average Frequency Type Numeric Power Cancel Increase Decrease Accept Figure 28 Setting the Auto Change Interval Page 38 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 5 2 6 4 Window Data The Window Data section of the menu allows you to select a particular type of dat
137. cy Phase C L N Voltage Phase CA L L Voltage Wath lee Voltage Battery Temperature Battery State of Charge Battery Time Remaining Ripple Voltage Power Engine Monitor Boost Pressure Hours Coolant Pressure Coolant Temp Exhaust Gas Temp Fuel Pressure Fuel Rate Oil Pressure Oil Temp Tachometer Tilt Trim Voltage Fuel Economy Fuel Consumption Percent Load Percent Torque Trip Fuel Used Environment Barometer Heat Index Humidity Inside Humidity Outside Moon Phase Sunrise Sunset Dew Point Temp Engine Room Temp Inside Temp Main Cabin Temp Outside Temp Sea Twilight AM Twilight PM Weather Wind Chill Fuel Management Distance to Empty Time to Empty Total Fuel Capacity Total Fuel Level Total Fuel Consumption Total Trip Fuel Used Total Fuel Economy Total Fuel Rate Total Fuel Remaining GPS COG Lat Lon SOG DOP Satellites Time Accuracy Heading Heading Rate of Turn Variation Humidity Inside Outside User Defined Page 240 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Navan SCO BTW COG XTE DTW ETA Lat Lon Rolling Road Set Drift SOG TTG VMG Waypoint Number amp Name TC Barometric Compressed Air Engine Boost Engine Coolant Engine Fuel Engine Oil Hydraulic Oil Steam Transmission Oil User Defined Rudder Ange amp Order Speed Through Water Over Ground Total Log Trip Log Tanks apachy Level Remaining Temperature Wind Chill Bait Well Battery Engine Coolant Eng
138. d of requesting device information each time one of these pages is requested Pressing the Enter key while this selection is highlighted will clear the list of devices It will be necessary to perform this action to remove traces of devices that have been removed from the bus 5 2 4 1 4 Restore Factory Defaults This option restores all settings on the DSM100 device to their factory default state 5 2 4 2 Advanced Information The Advanced Information Page displays information pertaining to the permanent setup and configuration of the DSM250 Page 30 Revision 1 4 16a Display Settings Advanced Information Boot Version 0 0 0 Bus Status Device Instance 0x00 0 Hardware Version 2 0 Industry Group Marine 4 Installation Description SI 2 Label Maretron Load Equivalency Number 13 650 mA Max Manufacturer Maretron 137 Figure 16 DSM250 Advanced Information Screen Most of the items within the Advanced Information menu are obvious and not described here although a less obvious menu item Bus Status is described below 5 2 4 2 1 Bus Status The DSM250 is capable of monitoring the NMEA 2000 network and displaying certain statistics Baud Rate the speed capability of the connected network given in bits per second bps Voltage the network voltage as measured by the DSM250 in Volts Traffic the percent usage of the total available bandwidth measured by the DSM250 Receive Rat
139. d then press Enter to go across to the numbers Now use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons again to select the required numeral and press Enter to transfer the numeral to the cursor position If another numeral is required repeat this last step or press the Back button top return to the choices on the left To append a punctuation character or other symbol use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons to select Sign and then press Enter to go across to the sign characters Now use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons again to select the required character and press Enter to transfer the character to the cursor position If another sign character is required repeat this last step or press the Back button top return to the choices on the left To append a space use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons to select Space and then press Enter To delete the character immediately preceding the underscore use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons to select Back and then press Enter Note that it is not possible to delete the entire text string use the Back function repeatedly to delete the characters one at a time Revision 1 4 16a Page 9 DSM250 User s Manual To abort the entire textual edit and return to the original field without changing the contents of the field use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons to select Exit without Saving and then press Enter To enter the text string in the original field use the Scroll Up and Scroll Do
140. device 6 6 3 Instance This field identifies the particular switch bank instance which is transmitted by this DCR100 This instance number is used by display products to select the particular bank of switches to be controlled or monitored 6 6 4 Channel 1 6 Configuration Each channel may be programmed into one of two different operating modes DCR Mode or ALM Mode 6 6 4 1 Channel 1 6 Configuration DCR Mode Page 70 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HW A8 Maretron DCR 100 17 19995 20 Channel 1 EAH HELM LIGHTS Operating Mode DCR switch Lock Unlock Power Up State Previous switch Control Off Figure 60 DCR100 Channel Configuration Screen DCR Mode 6 6 4 1 1 Label This entry allows you to assign a text label to the device This label is visible in Maretron analysis and display products and allows you to easily identify the particular device 6 6 4 1 2 Operating Mode The operating mode of each channel may be set to either DCR DC Relay in which case the state of the channel is controlled by Circuit Breaker Switch controls in N2KView or Switch Breaker favorite screens in the DSM150 DSM250 displays This section of the manual assumes the operating mode has been set to DCR 6 6 4 1 3 Switch Lock The default state of a channel in DCR Switch Lock mode is Unlocked In the Unlocked mode the channel may be turned on and of
141. dicate that a heading or wind direction has changed from the reference direction more than a programmable amount For example once a heading has been established an alert can be generated if the heading changes more than a specified amount Direction Alerts may also be set for wind direction The reference direction can be selected from the current direction heading or wind direction or it can be manually entered Figure 268 shows a Direction Alert and associated parameters Direction Alert Parameters Direction Alert I transitions i fhe NionRored ACGA take riter ine poy Set Delay sem a a Cancel Absolute Angle from Reference Direction Figure 268 Direction Alert Parameters Page 228 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 8 3 7 11 1 Trigger Configuration Direction Alert A Description Location d Trigger Configuration Triqger Type direction Alert Re trigger Period 5 00 min sec Offset Set Point 20 Alert Set Delay 0 06 min sec Offset Clear Point 15 Alert Clear Delay 0 06 min sec Reference Direction 270 Magnetic Get Current Direction Local Audible Enable Figure 269 Trigger Configuration Direction Alert Re trigger Period When you accept an alert it will change to the Accepted state and annunciators that are sounding for that alert will stop sounding If the condition which caused the alert remains true after the amount of time in this field the alert will return to the Ac
142. display Pressing the Enter key with NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable menu item selected causes the DSM250 to display the following screen Figure 52 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HWE SW B4 Maretron DM 10 HRS 10 i04 Advanced Configuration NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable He DC Detailed Status On TIS Battery Status On Figure 52 DCM100 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen You can enable or disable the transmission of the these messages or set the frequency of transmission of the message by pressing the Enter key on the message to be configured Options are e Disable The message will not be transmitted e Default The message will be transmitted at its default NMEA2000 rate e 1 0s 5 0s The message will be transmitted at the period specified Select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key Revision 1 4 16a Page 63 DSM250 User s Manual 6 5 1 5 Restore Factory Defaults This option restores all settings on the device to their factory default state 6 5 2 Current Sensor Zero Offset Calibration The DCM100 is shipped with a Hall effect current sensor In order to match the DCM100 unit and the sensor to one another and ensure maximum accuracy you should perform this calibration step while there is no current flowing through the current sensor Move the highlight bar to the Current Sensor Zero Offset Calibration and p
143. ds If the channel s Function is set to Pressure Vacuum the default data damping period is 3 0 seconds 6 13 2 2 Channel 0 5 Pressure Vacuum This section describes the channel configuration menu when the channel s Function has been set to Pressure Vacuum mode The Channel 0 5 Pressure Vacuum Mode menu is shown below Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HW SWE 58 Maretron FPM SN nooo 10 10 1 Channel ei Pressure Vacuum Instance eil Label AFT FUEL TANK Pressure at 4mA 0 0 PSI Pressure at 20mA 5 0 PSI Source Water Pressure Data Damping Period 3 05 6 13 2 2 1 Function You can set the channel s Function to Disabled Tank or Pressure Vacuum This section of the manual assumes that the channel s function has been set to Pressure Vacuum 6 13 2 2 2Instance This entry sets the instance number to be used in the Pressure message This entry may be set to ay value between 0 and 252 6 13 2 2 3Label A label may be assigned to each channel of the FPM100 as an aid to identifying the pressure that is being displayed Typically this label will describe the function or location of the pressure sensor Revision 1 4 16a Page 115 DSM250 User s Manual 6 13 2 2 4Pressure at 4mA Enter the pressure measured by the pressure sensor when it is outputting a 4mA current this will usually be zero 6 13 2 2 5Pressure at 20mA Enter the pressure measured by the press
144. ds should be adequate for the majority of applications but it may need to be increased for variation sources that transmit less frequently Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNF HWE SW 9 Maretron SL AN 10707 0 20 11 Advanced Configuration NMEA0183 Settings sentence Rate Selection DIOU ms 10 0Hz HDH Disable HDT Disable ROT Ams Ch is ATT M nz 10Hz Vanation Time S00ms 0 Hz Figure 167 SSC200 NMEA 0183 Sentence Rate Selection Screen 6 22 1 3 3Load Default Sentence Rate Selection The Load Default Sentence Rate Selection option will reset the NMEA 0183 sentence enable disable status along with transmission intervals and variation time to their factory default settings Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNe HWe SWe 49 Maretron SL A0 TO HI 20 11 Advanced Configuration NMEA0183 Settings sentence Rate Selection Load Default Sentence Rate Selection 3 Scroll Scroll Power Up Down Figure 168 SSC200 Load Default Periodic Rate Selection Page 156 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 6 22 1 4 NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable The SSC200 compass transmits several different messages which can be turned on or turned off by the DSM250 display Pressing the Enter key with NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable menu item selected causes the DSM250 to display the following screen Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNz HWe S
145. e An active alert can be accepted by the user causing it to become an Accepted Alert or disabled by the user causing it to become a Disabled Alert If the condition causing the alert is rectified the alert transitions to the Awaiting Cancel state Accepted An Accepted alert is an alarm or warning which was Active and has been accepted by the user A solid indicator on the Alert Status Screen indicates an Accepted alert annunciators are silenced Normally an alert is a serious matter that requires immediate attention and requires a deliberate attempt to remove the condition that caused the alert sometimes it isn t practical to immediately remove the condition that caused the alert accepting the alert will silence the annunciators while the appropriate user action is being taken To prevent an alert that has accepted by the user from being forgotten an accepted alert will transition back to being Active after a period of time set by the user If the condition causing the alert is rectified cleared the alert will transition to the Inactive state You may disable the alert at this time causing it to become a Disabled Alert Awaiting Cancel An Alert in the Awaiting Cancel state is an alert where the condition that caused the alarm or warning has been removed without the alert being accepted while it was Active To avoid such alerts from being missed by the user the alert is required to be cancelled You may cancel the alert at this t
146. e the DSM250 measured received rate in frames per second fps Transmit Rate the DSM250 measured transmit rate in frames per second fps Error Count the DSM250 measured error frames since entering the Bus Status screen Receive Counter the number of DSM250 measured received frames and Transmit Counter the number of DSM250 measured transmitted frames Bus Status Baud Rate 250000 bps Voltage 12 1 Volts CAN Frame Traffic gt 44 4 Receive Rate amp 45 fps Transmit Rate 2 tps Error Count 4 Times Receive Counter 0 Frames Transmit Counter 0 Frames Figure 17 Bus Status Display Revision 1 4 16a Page 31 DSM250 User s Manual 5 2 4 3 Backlight The DSM250 has three user programmable lighting levels which may be cycled through using the Lights key on the keypad while the DSM250 is operating in favorite screens mode Each time you quick press the Lights key in favorite screens mode the DSM250 backlight will transition between the Low setting the Medium setting and the High setting Note that a quick press of the Lights key changes the screen intensity or backlight while a long press changes the color palette as described in Section 5 2 4 4 The Backlight menu allows you to program the Low Medium and High brightness levels The value that appears next to the appropriate setting is measured in percent of full brightness The Backlight menu can be seen in
147. e Ct ga Pa ba Distance Log On Figure 82 DST110 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen You can enable or disable the transmission of the these messages or set the frequency of transmission of the message by pressing the Enter key on the message to be configured Options are e Off The message will not be transmitted e On The message will be transmitted at its default NMEA 2000 rate Select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 10 2 Clear Speed Calibration The Clear Speed Calibration configuration parameter shows you the currently used correction factor All measured STW readings are multiplied by this number before being transmitted over the NMEA 2000 network You can remove the correction factor by pressing the Enter key with the Clear Speed Calibration menu item selected And then choose Clear using Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key This changes the correction factor back to 1 Revision 1 4 16a Page 87 DSM250 User s Manual such that all subsequent measured STW readings are no longer adjusted before begin transmitted over the NMEA 2000 network 6 10 3 Speed Calibration The DST110 speed through water STW initial accuracy is significantly affected by the location or placement of the DST110 within the hull The DST110 can be corrected for these inaccuracies using the speed calibration procedure You
148. e E E ei elt AON EE 235 Oft Remote Aler AUGII Circ cictnscctcercisaccictacscnarectinwediveetinaneintedeciecivecdngadieerdnaceiedisdeesanesdenssleasdeaeeet ld 236 9 2 Elle Le We ge R E S E R A 236 8 8 Restore Factory RE EU UC 236 S a E El O E 238 10 WOU ISS FRO et ale EE 239 ip WR e ite Ee Te le CN 240 12 Technical SUDDO i i i sts se ee 245 To IA Et ele Knei 246 14 Maretron 2 Year Limited Warranty ccccccccccccccecceeeceeec cece eeseeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseesseeeeeeeeeeseeeaes 248 Revision 1 4 16a Page Ix DSM250 User s Manual Table of Figures Figure 1 Surface Mounting the DSMZn0 ccc cccccccceccceeceeeceeeceeecaeeceeeeueseueceeecaeeseeeseeeaeesaeeneesanees 3 Figure 2 Flush Mounting the DSM250 0 0 0 ccc cecc cece eeeceeeceeeseeeseeseeeseeeeeeeseeceeeceeeseeseeeseesaeeseeenaess 4 Foure Gimbal Mounting the IDSINIZ50 EE 5 Figure 4 NMEA 2000 Connector Face View 5 Foure o DSM290 Power UD Sr GEN BEN 6 Figure 6 Powerdown Countdown Gcreen aen EAEE EEE 7 Figure 7 Keypad and Key Names oannnnannnnannannnnnennnannnrnnrnrnrrnrnrrnrnnrnrrnrnrrnrnrrurnrrnrnnrnrrnrnernrnrrnennrnenne T Figures Entering aA TEE RTE EE 9 Figure 9 DSM250 Running in Favorite Screens MOEe ccccccceccseceeeeeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeaes 25 PIQUE TO Man MENU E 26 PIQUE 11 COMMOUNALOM SClOCM NEE 27 Figure 12 Device Selection Screen EE 28 Figure 13 DSM250 Display Settings Gcreen ccc ccccc ce
149. e ESAE E 116 0 14 1 Advanced Configuratio EEN 117 6 14 2 Cold Stat GPO EE 121 6 1453 GPS Mode Seling BEE 121 6 144 Re E EE 122 6 14 5 SBAS WAAS Enable Disable ba 122 SE Maretron GPSZ00 COnMGUEATION EE 124 AER EE WE elen Bei ue UE e E 124 6 19 2 COL Sta OGP EE 126 621973 DEVCELADO eebe eebe 126 6 15 4 SBAS WAAS EGNOS MSAS Enable Disable cc cccccccceeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 126 6 10 MaretronIPG 100 COMMOQUIaLION E 128 O10 2 DEVICE EADS ee E 130 631673 N2KSErNer FASS WOlG tee EE 130 Se Cp ad Re Nee Ree en Se ee ne Tee ener ee er eee eer eer ety ee ee teen ree 131 016 o UE 131 SN El Tei LMA K aen E ae rn ee ee ae eee ee 131 016 ee 131 6 16 8 Default DND 131 6247 Ee E E EAR ER e Lait Le Te sIn dss dads stags dladadtys dads dsc Oadaslncndadadgandocnduas Socata 132 O27 41 AGVanGed C OMMNGUI ANON EE 132 O2 Device EE 134 AER E NVIEA Z 000 nStanGe ENGING arne a 134 6 17 24 We Ee LA En e EE 135 AR KEE let eler 136 6 17 6 J1939 S0urce Address ee ET ALON EE 136 6 17 7 Refresh J1939 source address let 137 6 16 Marettom NBE TOO COnGUIaTION tossteis csntesvweuleseseredesmwsnlosnweniesacesedcsseosedesouvenivonueuiwens 137 6 16 Advanced COMTNGUI AION EE 138 6 19 Maretron RAA100 Configuration ccccccccccecccececeeeeeeeeeeceeeceeeseeeseeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseesseeeaess 138 6 19 T Advapced MUNGUIA OW sssr E E T E a MecGoeeeeuadeecetendie 139 o oA ADE EE 140 6 193 elle Ee elle e EE 141 0 194 RUGGED INUIMDG EE
150. e Increase Decrease Accept Figure 191 Custom Tank Level Calibration Confirmation Screen 6 23 4 2 American Standard Sender Calibration If you have a rectangular tank and a sender with the standard American resistance range 240 ohms full 33 ohms empty and you know the capacity of the tank you can easily calibrate the sender by using the Set to American Standard 240 33 ohm menu item Figure 192 below shows this option highlighted Use the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys to move the highlight over this menu item and then press the Enter key to write the calibration values within the TLA100 and complete the calibration process Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HW SWE TO Maretron TLA 00 AT D1 10 14 Tank Levels Calibration Custom Calibration set to American Standard 240 33 ohm set to European Standard 10 180 ohm Scroll Scroll Ur Down Power Bach Enter Figure 192 American Standard Sender Calibration 6 23 4 3 European Standard Sender Calibration If you have a rectangular tank and a sender with the standard European resistance range 0 ohms full 180 ohms empty and you know the capacity of the tank you can easily calibrate the sender by using the Set to European Standard 0 180 ohm menu item Figure 193 below shows this option highlighted Use the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys to move the highlight over thi
151. e Selection Scroll Scroll Up Down Figure 68 DSM150 DSM250 Copy display settings from local display 6 8 5 Copy favorite settings from local display It is also possible to copy the favorite screen settings from one DSM250 to a remote DSM150 DSM250 unit This menu item can be seen selected in below Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNF HWe Swe Tl Maretron DSH250 TATE 10 13 0 Advanced Configuration Copy alarms settings from local display Copy device selection from local display Copy display settings from local display Copy favorite cl from local display y DS Copy all settings Weg local display Label Test Remote Device Selection Power h U scroll Enter Figure 69 DSM150 DSM250 Copy favorite settings from local display By selecting this menu item and pressing Enter all the favorite screen settings will be copied from the local DSM250 to the selected remote DSM150 DSM250 unit After copying favorite screen settings it is necessary to restart the remote unit A screen which can be seen in below will appear indicating that favorite settings have been successfully transferred to the remote DSM150 DSM250 and that the remote DSM150 DSM250 must be restarted to complete the operation Press Enter to restart the remote DSM150 DSM250 unit complete the favorite settings transfer operation and return to the previous menu selection Page 78 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Configuration
152. e complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNe He SW C1 Maretron EMS W0 Ga 20 L me Engine Instance dei sauge Type No Gauge Drive Trim Sender Type YANMAR Drive Trim Sender Offset 0 Boost Pres Gauge Type No Gauge Boost Pres Sender Type YANMAR Boost Pres Sender Offset 0 Oil Pres Gauge Type No Gauge Oil Pres Sender Type YANMAR Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNe HWe SWE C1 Maretron EMS M 20 L Oil Pres Sender Type YANMAR Oil Pres Sender Offset 0 Water Temp Gauge Type No Gauge Water Temp Sender Type YANMAR Water Temp Sender Offset 0 Tach Flywheel Teeth d 129 Preset Engine Hours 10 NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Restore Factory Defaults Scroll Up Figure 87 EMS100 Configuration Screen 6 11 1 Engine Instance This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the unit You usually will not need to modify the default value of 0 unless you have multiple engines on the network By convention the Port Engine is given an instance number of 0 and the Starboard Engine an instance number of 1 If there is a third center engine it should be given an instance number of 2 6 11 2 Boost Pressure Gauge Type The EMS
153. e deck of a moving or stationary vessel does not subtract out the speed of the vessel Ground Direction displays the angle of the wind relative to true or magnetic north depending on the unit setting of the heading parameter see Section 5 2 7 1 measured relative to a stationary observer calculated using heading course over ground COG and speed over ground SOG Page 20 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron True Direction displays the angle of the wind relative to the vessel center line vessel s speed is subtracted from Apparent wind direction calculated using speed through water STW or speed over ground SOG depending on the unit setting of the Wind True Vessel Ref Parameter see Section 5 2 7 6 Apparent Speed displays the speed of the wind as it appears to an observer on the deck of a moving or stationary vessel does not subtract out the speed of the vessel Ground Speed displays the speed of the wind relative to a stationary observer calculated using heading course over ground COG and speed over ground SOG True Speed displays the speed of the wind as it would appear to an observer if the vessel was stopped in the water calculated using speed through water STW or speed over ground SOG depending on the unit setting of the Wind True Vessel Ref Parameter see Section 5 2 7 6 Revision 1 4 16a Page 21 DSM250 User s Manual 4 3 Alerts An alert is a signal to a user that there is ei
154. e units to be used for the display of all wind speed related information Units that may be selected are the following Knots Miles Hour Km Hour Beaufort Meters second 5 2 6 Wind True Vessel Ref This menu items allows you to select whether the true wind direction and speed referenced to the vessel are relative to the water or the ground Sailors are generally interested in measurements relative to the water while power boaters are interested in measurements relative to the ground Station is for home applications e fixed mounting location unlike a vessel that changes direction Formats that may be selected are the following e Water e Ground e Station 5 2 Temperature This menu item allows you to select the units to be used for the display of all temperature related information Units that may be selected are the following e F e C 5 2 8 Atmospheric Pressure This menu item allows you to select the units to be used for the display of atmospheric barometric pressure Units that may be selected are the following Inches Mercury in Hg Bar Millibars Millimeters Mercury mm Hg kPa Page 42 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 5 2 9 Fluid Pressure This menu item allows you to select the units to be used for the display of fluid pressure Units that may be selected are the following e Pounds Square Inch PSI e kPa e Bar 5 2 7 10 Volume This menu item allows you to select the units to be used for the display
155. ed Configuration NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable 127301 Dina Switch Bank Figure 162 SIM100 NMEA 20007 PGN Enable Disable Screen You can enable or disable the transmission of the Binary Switch Status message or set the frequency of transmission of the message by pressing the Enter key on the message to be configured Options are e Disable The status message will not be transmitted e Default The status message will be transmitted at its default NUEA2000 rate which is once every 15 seconds and each time the value changes e 1s 15s The status message will be transmitted at the period specified and each time the value changes Select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 21 1 4 Restore Factory Defaults This option restores all settings on the device to their factory default state 6 21 2 Device Label A label may be assigned to the SIM100 as an aid to identifying the device over the network Typically this label will describe the location of the SIM100 See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value Page 152 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 6 21 3 Instance From here the instance used in the data message may be set 6 21 4 Channel Configuration To configure an individual channel use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons to highlight the channel and then press Enter The following screen will be displayed Configuration Device Conf
156. ed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model So B2 Maretron ACH WO TH 1 Advanced Configuration Current Transformer 00A Current Transformer B 100A Current Transformer 100A HW SW 10 10 7 Current Transformer A Inverse Install Current Transformer B Inverse Install Current Transformer C Normal Install Damping Period Power Damping Period V I F Figure 44 ACM100 Advanced Configuration Screen 6 3 1 1 Current Transformer A The ACM100 with firmware revision 1 0 7 or newer supports two different types of current sensors the 100A current sensor included with the unit and an optional 400A current sensor This menu entry allows you to indicate which type of current sensor you have installed for phase A Page 54 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 6 3 1 2 Current Transformer B The ACM100 with firmware revision 1 0 7 or newer supports two different types of current sensors the 100A current sensor included with the unit and an optional 400A current sensor This menu entry allows you to indicate which type of current sensor you have installed for phase B 6 3 1 3 Current Transformer C The ACM100 with firmware revision 1 0 7 or newer supports two different types of current sensors the 100A current sensor included with the unit and an optional 400A current sensor This m
157. een and the second occupying the bottom 2 3 of the screen e Half Left Qtr Qtr three parameters will be displayed the first occupying the left half of the screen the second occupying the upper right hand corner of the screen and the third occupying the lower right hand corner of the screen e Qtr Half Qtr three parameters will be displayed the first occupying the top left hand corner of the screen the second occupying the upper right hand corner of the screen and the third occupying the lower right hand corner of the screen e Half Left Right two parameters will be displayed the first occupying the left half of the screen and the second occupying the right half of the screen e Half Top Bottom two parameters will be displayed the first occupying the top half of the screen and the second occupying the bottom half of the screen Revision 1 4 16a Page 37 DSM250 User s Manual e 2 Qtrs Half Bottom three parameters will be displayed the first occupying the upper left hand corner of the screen the second occupying the upper right hand corner of the screen and the third occupying the bottom half of the screen e Half Top 2 Qtrs three parameters will be displayed the first occupying the top of the screen the second occupying the lower left hand corner of the screen and the third occupying the lower right hand corner of the screen e Four Quarters four parameters will be displayed the first oc
158. el SHN HW SWe 0E Maretron DSTWO WD 565 DS Sv 300 Advanced Configuration Clear Speed Calibration 1 000 speed Calibration Transducer Depth Offset 0 8 ft Trip Log 0 0 nm GET Cancel Accept Figure 79 Resetting the DST100 Trip Distance Log Revision 1 4 16a Page 85 DSM250 User s Manual 6 10 Maretron DST110 Configuration The DSM250 is capable of configuring Maretron s DST110 for several different parameters including trip log resetting transducer depth offset temperature calibration and speed calibration Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HW SW Zi Maretron DST 10 g D235 511003 10 Clear Speed Calibration Clear speed Calibration Clear Temperature Offset 0 0 F Temperature Calibration Transducer Depth Offset 6 0 ft Trip Log 0 0 nm Reset Figure 80 DST110 Configuration Screen 6 10 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SHY HW SW Zi Maretron DST 10 D235 511003 10 Advanced Configuration Device Instance Instance Temperature 3 Installation Description NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Figure 81 DST110 Advanced Configuration Screen 6 10 1 1 Device Instance
159. ember is at the helm every 15 minutes When a Time Alert with a Repeat Interval of zero is accepted it will be Disabled to prevent further triggering When a Time Alert with a Repeat Interval greater than zero is accepted it will transition to the Inactive state waiting for the next time it should trigger Revision 1 4 16a Page 229 DSM250 User s Manual 8 3 7 12 1 Trigger Configuration Time Alert Alert Detail Data Local Time Instance Any Description Location d Trigger Configuration Trigger Type mlime Alert Re trigger Period 0 05 hh mm Alert Time 3 22 Local Audible Enable Tone Continuous Remote Annunciator s Operating Mode_Moored Enable Figure 270 Alert Editor Time Alert Alert Time The alert will become active at the time specified in this field If the time specified has already passed then the alarm will be set for the next day Entering a number without the colon will assume that the hours are zero Repeat Interval The alert will become active again after the period specified in this field For example if the Alarm Time were set to 8 00 and the Repeat Interval were set to 1 00 1 hour zero minutes the Alarm would become active again at 9 00 10 00 and so on 8 3 8 Local Audible If the Local Audible field is set to Enabled the speaker internal to the DSM250 will be activated when this Alert is triggered 8 3 9 Tone If Local Audible is enabled the tone that is
160. enu entry allows you to indicate which type of current sensor you have installed for phase C 6 3 1 4 Current Transformer A If you notice that the power measurements of phase A are negative when they should be positive or vice versa then the current transformer has been installed backwards If this happens then instead of reconnecting the current transformer you may change the value of this parameter from the default value of Normal Install to Inverse Install to correct for this Valid options are e Inverse Install e Normal Install Use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons to select the correct option and then press Enter to save the value 6 3 1 5 Current Transformer B If you notice that the power measurements of phase B are negative when they should be positive or vice versa then the current transformer has been installed backwards If this happens then instead of reconnecting the current transformer you may change the value of this parameter from the default value of Normal Install to Inverse Install to correct for this Valid options are e Inverse Install e Normal Install Use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons to select the correct option and then press Enter to save the value 6 3 1 6 Current Transformer C If you notice that the power measurements of phase C are negative when they should be positive or vice versa then the current transformer has been installed backwards If this happens
161. ept key a screen shown in Figure 41 below appears instructing you to now lower both trim tabs to the full down position It is important that you do this without stopping in order for the calibration process to succeed Trim Tabs Calibration emma up 2 F 3 Lower both trim tabs to full down position without stopping Power Figure 41 EP 30 Intermediate Calibration Screen After you have lowered both trim tabs to their full down position and a few seconds have elapsed the screen shown in Figure 42 below should appear indicating that the calibration of the trim tab sensors has completed successfully You may now press any key to return to the previous menu ITrim Tabs Calibration NM Calibration completed successfully Press any key to continue Power Figure 42 EP 30 Calibration Success Message Revision 1 4 16a Page 53 DSM250 User s Manual 6 3 Maretron ACM100 Configuration This describes the configuration of the Maretron ACM100 firmware version 1 0 6 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SHY B1 Maretron ACH TEH AC Circuit Type 3 Phase Y Ph A B C AC Device Type Utility HW SW 10 10 6b2 Device Instance ei Label SHORE POWER Reset Total Energy Recorded Figure 43 ACM100 Configuration Screen 6 3 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be perform
162. equency displays average frequency of the AC power on the bus Average L N Voltage displays average line to neutral RMS voltage of the AC power on the bus Average L L Voltage displays average line to line RMS voltage of the AC power on the bus Phase A Frequency displays frequency of the AC power on phase A of the Bus Phase A L N Voltage displays phase A Line to Neutral RMS voltage of the AC Bus Phase AB L L Voltage displays phase A Line to phase B Line RMS voltage of the AC Bus Phase B Frequency displays frequency of the AC power on phase B of the bus Phase B L N Voltage displays phase B Line to Neutral RMS voltage of the AC Bus Phase BC L L Voltage displays phase B Line to phase C Line RMS voltage of the AC Bus Phase C Frequency displays frequency of the AC power on phase C of the bus Phase C L N Voltage displays phase C Line to Neutral RMS voltage of the AC Bus Phase CA L L Voltage displays phase C Line to phase A Line RMS voltage of the AC Bus 4 2 2 AC Generator Average Current displays the average current of the AC power on the generator Average Frequency displays the average frequency of the AC power on the generator Average L N Voltage displays average line to neutral RMS voltage of the AC power on the generator Average L L Voltage displays average line to line RMS voltage of the AC power on the generator Total Real Power displays real power output by the generator Total React
163. er gallon or kilometers per liter using the specified GPS and specified engine instances within the favorite screen setup see Section 5 2 6 4 2 for details Page 16 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Total Fuel Rate displays rate of fuel usage per unit time for example gallons or liters per hour for all engine instances specified within the favorite screen setup see Section 5 2 6 4 2 for details Total Fuel Remaining displays total fuel remaining in all fuel tanks specified within the favorite screen setup see Section 5 2 6 4 2 In order for the DSM250 to properly calculate total fuel remaining tank monitors connected to the network must provide tank capacity in addition to fluid level Distance to Empty displays the distance you can travel before all fuel is consumed assuming all conditions remain the same The DSM250 computes distance to empty using several different parameters including the total fuel remaining see above and fuel economy also discussed above Remember conditions can rapidly change that may drastically effect distance to empty For example if you are going out to sea with the wind and current behind you the distance to empty may indicate that there is enough fuel to return home when in fact there isn t enough fuel to return Distance to empty is only applicable if the conditions remain the same Time to Empty displays the amount of time you can travel before all fuel is consumed assuming all condition
164. er key with NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable menu item selected causes the DSM250 to display the following screen Figure 90 Revision 1 4 16a Page 97 DSM250 User s Manual Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HW SW 69 Maretron FFM 100 79959 10 1121 Advanced Configuration NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Engine Parameters Dynamic Trip Parameters Engine Temperature Fluid Flow Rate Trip Volume Figure 90 FFM100 NMEA PGN Enable Disable Screen You can enable or disable the transmission of a PGN message or set the frequency of transmission of the message by pressing the Enter key on the message to be configured Options are Off The PGN will not be transmitted On The PGN will be transmitted at its default NMEA2000 rate 0 5s 5s The PGN will be transmitted at the interval specified Select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 12 1 9 Restore Factory Defaults This option restores all settings on the device to their factory default state 6 12 2 Device Label A label may be assigned to the FFM100 as an aid to identifying the device over the network Typically this label will describe the location of the FFM100 6 12 3 Operating Mode The FFM100 can operate in one of two user selectable operating modes Differential this mode is used for diesel engines that recirculate unused fuel back into the fuel take
165. ert Parameters cccccccecceccceeceeceeeceeceeceueceecaeecseseecaeeceesueeceeseeseeseesaesaueenaes 219 Figure 259 Trigger Configuration LOW Alert 220 Figure 260 Trigger Configuration Data Unavailable Alert 221 Figure 261 Trigger Configuration On Alert 222 Figure 262 Trigger Configuration Data Unavailable Alert 223 Figure 263 Trigger Configuration Editor Tripped Alert ccccccccccececeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeaees 224 Figure 264 Outside Alert Parameters cccccccccccsccceeeceeeeeeceueceeecaeecueesseseueseeseeecaeeseeseuesseeseeesaees 224 Figure 265 Trigger Configuration Outside Radius Alert 225 Figure 266 Trigger Configuration Inside Radius Alert 226 Figure 267 Trigger Configuration GPS Quality Alert 227 Figure 268 Direction Alert Parameters A 228 Figure 269 Trigger Configuration Direction Alert 229 Figure 270 Alert Editor Time Alert 230 Figure 271 Remote Annunciator Enable Disable annannannannnnnnnnnnnnnernnnnrnnnrnnrnnrnnrsrrnrrrrrnrrnrnnrnn 231 Figure 272 Deleting an Alert 232 FIGURE 275 ClO HI AC d E EE 233 Figure 274 Deleting an Alert Confirmation ccccccccccceccceeeceeceeeceeececaeeceeecaeeceesaesseeseeeseeenaes 233 Wlslfl a E ke Ea E a EE 234 Figure 2 6 Editing an Alert Alert ist 234 Figure 2 7 Setting the Vessel Operating Mode
166. es the engine on the J1939 network the Engine Instance indentifies the engine to the NMEA2000 network Page 134 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model Sg HW SWE AS Maretron JA 100 1240008 10 10 11 Advanced Configuration Device Label NMEA2000 Instance Engine Transmission AClicemaker 0 J1939 Source Address Refresh J1939 source address list JHW SA None Figure 136 J2K100 Engine Instance Configuration Use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys to change the value to the desired value you wish to use as the engine instance identifier and then press the Enter key to accept the value and store it within the J2K100 6 17 4 Transmission Instance This entry allows a transmission to be mapped to an NMEA2000 instance number Each transmission on an NMEA 2000 network must have a unique instance identifier to allow display devices to distinguish it from other transmissions on the network The NMEA2000 Transmission Instance menu item allows you to configure the transmission instance identifier which will be sent over the NMEA 2000 network along with transmission related NMEA 2000 messages In order to configure this parameters use the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys to move the highlighted cursor to the NMEA2000 Transmission Instance menu item Then press the Enter key to move the highlight to the numeric value on the right as s
167. ess the Abort key and the speed calibration will not be altered 6 1 7 Clear Temperature Offset The Clear Temperature Offset configuration parameter shows you the currently used temperature correction offset All measured sea temperature readings have this value added to them before being transmitted over the NMEA 2000 network You can set the correction offset to zero by pressing the Enter key with the Clear Speed Calibration menu item selected And then choose Clear using Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key This changes the correction factor back to 0 such that all subsequent measured sea temperature readings are no longer adjusted before begin transmitted over the NMEA 2000 network Revision 1 4 16a Page 49 DSM250 User s Manual 6 1 8 Temperature Calibration The temperature calibration screen shown below indicates the sea temperature as measured by the Airmar temperature transducer which can be changed to the actual sea temperature by following these steps Use the Increase and Decrease keys to adjust the display value until it matches the known sea temperature Press the Accept key to accept the value when you are satisfied If you do not wish to perform temperature calibration at this time press the Abort key and the temperature calibration will not be altered Water Temperature Calibration 1 Select Water Temperature 03 4 TE 2 Press lt
168. etron RAA SW Too 10 145 Rudder Angle Calibration set to American Standard 240 33 ohm set to European Standard 10 180 ohm Figure 146 RAA100 Rudder Angle Calibration Options There are three methods of calibrating the rudder angle sender 6 19 3 1 Custom Calibration The Custom Calibration setting will provide the most accurate rudder angle readings under any circumstances but it requires that you go through a process in which you set the rudder to full port then center and then full starboard each time indicating the angle of the rudder to the DSM250 The RAA100 will measure the sender resistance at each point and create a custom calibration map which relates the resistance of the sender with the rudder angle Custom calibration is necessary for non Revision 1 4 16a Page 141 DSM250 User s Manual standard values of resistances for rudder angle senders and for rudders with maximum port and starboard angles of anything other than 45 To perform custom calibration of the rudder angle sender use the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys to move the highlighted cursor over the Custom Calibration menu item Then press the Enter key to confirm your selection and begin the calibration process Figure 147 shows the DSM250 with the Custom Rudder Calibration menu item highlighted Configuration Device Configuration WA Manufacturer Model sH HW SW 60 Maretron RAA DO 10 12 Rudder Angle Ca
169. evel message or set the frequency of transmission of the message by pressing the Enter key on the message to be configured Options are e Off The status message will not be transmitted e On The status message will be transmitted at its default NMEA2000 rate Select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 23 1 4 Restore Factory Defaults This option restores all settings on the device to their factory default state 6 23 2 Label See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value 6 23 3 Tank Capacity In order for the TLA100 to produce readings of the amount of fluid remaining in the tank the tank capacity must be programmed into the TLA100 adapter Figure 184 below shows a screen shot of the tank capacity being configured Page 166 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron To program the tank capacity use the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys to move the highlighted cursor over the Tank Capacity menu item Then press the Enter key to move the highlight over the numerical tank capacity value Use the Increase and Decrease keys to change the value to the desired tank capacity value and finally press the Enter key to confirm your selection and store the value within the TLA100 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNF HWe SW 3 Maretron TLAW KIK 10 LAM Advanced Configuration Label Aft Fuel Tank Capacity MR
170. evice Configuration HA Manufacturer Model SH HW SW T3 Maretron TLM SN Fal Ti i 10 114 Advanced Configuration ET TING Port Mid Tank Capacity 81 4 Gallons Tank Levels Calibration Tank Number 2 Tank Type Fuel Figure 199 TLM100 Configuration Screen 6 24 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HW SW 3 Maretron TUNN Ar Ei 10 114 Advanced Configuration Device Instance D Installation Description NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Restore Factory Defaults Figure 200 TLM100 Advanced Configuration Screen 6 24 1 1 Device Instance This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the unit You usually will not need to modify the default value of O unless you have multiple units on the network 6 24 1 2 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was Page 176 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later 6 24 1 3 NMEA2000 PGN Enable
171. evision 1 4 16a Page 101 DSM250 User s Manual 6 12 4 2 1Sensor You may select whether this channel is connected to a 3 phase sensor Maretron fuel flow sensors with three pulse outputs or a 1 phase sensor other manufacturer s fluid flow sensors with a single pulse output 6 12 4 2 2Engine Instance Program this parameter to match the desired engine instance number of the flow rate and total fuel used for this channel You can program this parameter to any value between 0 and 252 NOTE If the operating mode is set to Differential Flow Rate then this parameter is unavailable for Channel 0 6 12 4 2 3 Engine Label Each channel has a text label you can set to identify the load controlled by that channel for example PORT ENGINE or COOLING WATER FLOW For each channel set this to a value which describes the flow being monitored so that you can easily identify it in display devices 6 12 4 2 4K Factor Program this parameter to match the K factor that appears on the flow sensor connected to this channel 6 12 4 2 5Data Damping Period You can configure a damping parameter to smooth the flow rate readings or make them more responsive The data damping is configurable between 0 2 25 0 seconds The default data damping period is 3 0 seconds 6 12 4 2 6Reset Total Volume Recorded The FFM100 maintains the total volume recorded in EEPROM so that it is maintained across power cycles Select this menu entry to
172. evision 1 4 16a Page 59 DSM250 User s Manual installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value 6 4 1 3 NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable The ALM100 Annunciator Module transmits the NUEA2000 PGN 130824 which can be turned on or turned off by the DSM250 display Pressing the Enter key with NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable menu item selected causes the DSM250 to display the following screen Figure 49 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model lh HW SW 8 Maretron ALMWO Han 10 105 Advanced Configuration NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable IN Annunciator TTT A Figure 49 ALM100 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen You can enable or disable the transmission of the Annunciator message or set the frequency of transmission of the message by pressing the Enter key on the message to be configured Options are e Disable The Annunciator message will not be transmitted e Default The Annunciator message will be transmitted at its default NUEA2000 rate and each time the value changes e 0 5s 5s The Annunciator message will be transmitted at the period specified and each time the value changes Select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 4 1 4 Restore Factory Defaults This option restores all settings on the device to their facto
173. f from network display devices By setting the Switch Lock mode of the channel to Lock then channel will not change state until the Switch Lock mode has once again been set to Unlocked 6 6 4 1 4 Power Up State This entry defines the state of the channel when the DCR100 is powered up You may set this entry of OPT in which the channel powers up in the Off state the solid state relay is open You may also set this entry to On in which the channel powers up in the On state the solid state relay is closed Finally you may set this entry to Previous in which the channel powers up to the state it was in when power was previously removed 6 6 4 1 5 Switch Control This entry will show the current state of the relay channel either Off open or On closed You may use this menu entry to turn the relay channel on or off 6 6 4 2 Channel 1 6 Configuration ALM Mode Revision 1 4 16a Page 71 DSM250 User s Manual Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HWE SW A8 Maretron DCR 100 17 19995 20 1113 Channel 1 Label HELM LIGHTS Operating Mode ALM ALM Instance e Test Annunciator Figure 61 DCR100 Channel Configuration Screen ALM Mode 6 6 4 2 1 Label This entry allows you to assign a text label to the device This label is visible in Maretron analysis and display products and allows you to easily identify the particular device 6 6 4 2 2 Operating Mode
174. faces or e There is no magnetic variation source available If variation sources are available on both the NMEA 2000 and NMEA 0183 interfaces you must tell the SSC200 which source to use Figure 178 below shows the NMEA 0183 source selected This causes the SSC200 to use variation data from the NMEA 0183 interface and ignore all other variation sources e NMEA 2000 interface and manual entries Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HWe Swe 49 Maretron SoC AN TOH 20 20 11 Advanced Configuration Installation Offset Calibration invert Installation Normal Installation Label Magnetic Deviation Calibration Magnetic Deviation Status Rate of Turn Damping Period 2 0s Rate of Turn Zero Offset Calibration Variation Source Power Scroll Scroll Up Down Figure 178 Setting Variation Source to NMEA 0183 Only Enter Page 162 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Figure 179 below shows the NMEA 2000 source selected Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNe HW SW 49 WMaretron SL A0 IA 20 20 11 Advanced Configuration Installation Offset Calibration Invert Installation Normal Installation Label Magnetic Deviation Calibration Magnetic Deviation Status Rate of Turn Damping Period 2 0s Rate of Turn Zero Offset Calibration Variation Source Scroll Scroll Up Down Figure 179 Setting Variation Source to NMEA 2000 Only Power
175. field the alert will return to the Active state and annunciators will begin sounding again for that alert If a value of 0 00 is entered then the alert will never re trigger Alert Set Delay If a valid value for the parameter being monitored is continually not received or has an invalid value for the amount of time specified in this field the alert will become active Alert Clear Delay The parameter being monitored must continually be received with a valid value for longer than the time in this field in order for the alert to become inactive 8 3 7 4 Trigger Type is On Alert As opposed to high and low alerts that are associated with analog input signals e many different possible input values there are also switch alerts that are associated with a binary input value sometimes called on or off yes or no enabled or disabled set or reset active or inactive The switch alert is similar to the high and low alert except that there are no set or reset points The mere fact that the switch is seen as On causes the alert to become an active alert assuming the Set Delay is set to zero Likewise if the switch being monitored is seen as false i e binary 0 then the alert becomes inactive assuming the Clear Delay is set to zero If the delays are not programmed to zero then the switch must remain On for the Set Delay before the alert becomes active and must remain Off for the Clear Delay before the alert becomes inactive 8 3 7
176. figuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNF HWe SW 49 Maretron SoC AN 1D 20 20 11 Advanced Configuration Installation Offset Calibration invert Installation Normal Installation Label Magnetic Deviation Calibration Magnetic Deviation Status Rate of Turn Damping Period Rate of Turn Zero Offset Calibration Variation Source NMEA0183 or NMEA2000 Cancel Increase Decrease Accept Figure 175 Programming SSC200 Rate of Turn Damping Period 6 22 8 Rate of Turn Zero Offset Calibration The DSM250 is capable of displaying rate of turn information from a Maretron SSC200 compass Although the compass provides very accurate rate of turn information it can drift off of zero even though the vessel is not turning Fortunately the SSC200 can learn the zero offset for different conditions found on the vessel You teach the compass these Zero offset values by pressing the Enter key with the Rate of Turn Zero Offset Calibration menu item selected which causes the DSM250 to display the screen shown in Figure 176 The Rate of Turn Offset Calibration should be done before the Deviation Calibration section 6 22 5 Rate of Turn Zero Offset Cal 11 The vessel must remain absolutely still during calibration no pitch or roll or turning Current Rate of Turn 2 min 2 Press lt Begin gt to start calibration
177. figured using the DSM250 This describes the configuration of the Maretron USB100 firmware version 1 8 2 The USB100 configuration menu is shown in Figure 216 below There is one configurable item for the USB100 and that is Remote Device Selection Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SHN HW SW 36 Maretron USB OO Thi 10 18 2 Advanced Configuration Power Scroll Scroll Up Down Figure 216 USB100 Configuration Screen 6 28 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNF HWe SW 36 Maretron USB WO TESH 10 18 2 Advanced Configuration ADRIEN ei Installation Description Restore Factory Defaults Scroll Scroll Up Down Power Figure 217 USB100 Advanced Configuration Screen 6 28 1 1 Device Instance This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the unit You usually will not need to modify the default value of O unless you have multiple units on the network Revision 1 4 16a Page 187 DSM250 User s Manual 6 28 1 2 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here s
178. full 33 ohms at empty e Set to European Standard 0 180 ohm use for rectangular tanks using a tank level sender with the standard European resistance range 0 ohms at full 180 ohms at empty 6 23 4 1 Custom Calibration The Custom Calibration setting will provide the most accurate tank level readings under any circumstances but it requires that you go through a process in which you gradually fill the tank stopping periodically to input the current fluid level The TLA100 will measure the sender resistance at each point and create a custom calibration map which relates the resistance of the sender with the fluid levels Figure 186 below shows a screenshot of the DSM250 with the Custom Calibration option highlighted Custom calibration is necessary for non rectangular tanks and for non standard values of resistances for tank level senders To perform custom calibration of the tank level sender use the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys to move the highlighted cursor over the Custom Calibration menu item Then press the Enter key to confirm your selection and begin the calibration process Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HWz SW TO Maretron TLA 00 AT G1 10 14 Tank Levels Calibration set to American Standard 240 33 ohm Set to European Standard 10 180 ohm Scroll Scroll Ur Power Bach Down Enter Figure 186 Performing Custom Ca
179. g charge etc 6 5 3 1 Battery Type The available battery types are Flooded Wet Gel AGM Other Selecting one of these types causes the remaining parameters to be set to appropriate default values 6 5 3 2 Nominal Voltage You may program here the nominal voltage of the battery which is used only for reporting over the NMEA 2000 network Available choices are 6 12 24 32 36 42 and 48 Volts 6 5 3 3 Equalization You may indicate here whether or not the battery supports equalization This is used only for reporting over the NMEA 2000 network Available choices are e Supported e Not Supported 6 5 3 4 Temperature Coefficient The capacity of a battery generally increases with increasing temperature So that the DCM100 can properly calculate the battery s state of charge program this parameter with the increase in battery capacity in percent per increase in temperature in degrees Celsius The temperature coefficient can be set to a value between 0 C 5 C 6 5 3 5 Peukert Exponent The Peukert Exponent for the battery can be set to a value between 1 0 and 1 5 Please refer to section 4 8 on page 11 for details Revision 1 4 16a Page 65 DSM250 User s Manual 6 5 3 6 Charge Efficiency Factor The Charge Efficiency Factor for the battery can be set to a value between 5 and 100 Please refer to Section 4 6 1 on page 11 for details 6 5 3 7 Fully Charged Voltage In order for the DCM100 to determine when a battery i
180. gardless of the accuracy of the fix 6 14 1 5 SNR Mask The DSM250 is capable of setting the SNR Signal to Noise Ratio Mask on a GPS100 You choose this setting by pressing the Enter key with the GPS SNR Mask menu item selected which results in the screen shown in Figure 116 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNF HWet SW 21 Maretron GPS Ww AN 21 20 1 Advanced Configuration Device Instance 211 GPS Antenna Altitude 0 00 m GPS Elevation Mask 7 5 GPS PDOP Mask Disable GPS SNR Mask ma29 00 dB Installation Description NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Restore Factory Defaults Cancel Increase Decrease Accept Figure 116 Configuring SNR Mask on a GPS100 The allowable values for the SNR Mask are between 1 dB and 60 dB This number represents the Signal to noise ratio of a satellite s signal as received by the GPS100 Higher numbers indicate a Revision 1 4 16a Page 119 DSM250 User s Manual better quality signal The GPS will exclude satellites with signal to noise ratios lower than the value of this parameter from the position solution 6 14 1 6 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later See
181. ge Interval Seconds Window 1 Data Fuel Management Total Fuel Consumption Type Numeric GPS Instance 40 Title Default Total Fuel Consumption Window 2 Data AC Bus Average Frequency Type Numeric Figure 26 Favorite Screen Parameters 5 2 6 1 Favorite Mode This entry allows you to select in which display method of favorite screens mode this particular favorite screen is enabled This parameter has four possible settings Off this favorite screen is disabled and is not displayed Auto this favorite screen is displayed only in Auto mode Manual this favorite screen is displayed only in Manual mode Auto Manual this favorite screen is displayed in both Auto and Manual modes 5 2 6 2 Format The DSM250 offers many methods and formats of displaying multiple data items at a given time This parameter is used to program how many data items will appear on this particular favorite screen and in what sizes these items will appear A graphical preview of the selected format will appear in the upper right hand corner of the display This parameter has the following settings e Full Window one parameter will be displayed taking up the entire screen e 2 3 Top 1 3 Bottom two parameters will be displayed the first occupying the top 2 3 of the screen and the second occupying the bottom 1 3 of the screen e 1 3 Top 2 3 Bottom two parameters will be displayed the first occupying the top 1 3 of the scr
182. ghlight to the numerical value on the right This is shown in Figure 229 below Use the Increase and Decrease keys to adjust the damping period to the desired value and then press the Enter key to accept the value and store it within the WSO100 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNe HWe SW 8A Maretron W500 TAH 20 207 Advanced Configuration Device Label ROOF Installation Offset Calibration Wind Data Damping Period ED Barometric Pressure 29 80 Inches Mercury Outside Humidity 13 Percent Outside Temperature 80 F Cancel Increase Decrease Accept Figure 229 Setting the Wind Data Damping Period 6 30 5 Barometric Pressure The WSO100 has an internal barometer which is pre calibrated before leaving the factory If the unit requires re calibrating then this field allows the entry of the actual pressure This may be necessary if the vessel is on a lake with an altitude other than sea level and the user wishes to normalize the barometric pressure to sea level Revision 1 4 16a Page 195 DSM250 User s Manual Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNF HWe Swe 8A Maretron W500 TAH 20 207 Advanced Configuration Device Label ROOF Installation Offset Calibration Wind Data Damping Period 4 0s Barometric Pressure KEIRIIDDRIDO Outside Humidity 13 Pereen Outside Temperature 82 F Cancel Increase Decrease Accept Figure 230 Setting the
183. ghts key to return to normal operating mode The highlight will disappear Page 210 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron HELM LIGHTS NAV LIGHTS NAVELECT VHF RADIO Figure 252 Favorite Screen Showing Highlighted Switch Breaker Revision 1 4 16a Page 211 DSM250 User s Manual 8 Alerts The DSM250 can act as both an Alert Source and an Alert Monitor An Alert Source monitors parameters received on the NMEA2000 bus against a user entered threshold and displays alerts when parameters go out of range It will also transmit this Alert information to other Alert Monitors on the bus Platinum copies of N2KView or other DSM250s and sound the ALM100 annunciators as required Operators may accept or cancel the Alerts from the buttons on the front of the DSM250 An Alert Monitor the DSM250 monitors the bus for Alert messages from Alert Sources and displays the remote Alert information on the DSM250 s screen Operators may accept or cancel the remote Alerts from the buttons on the front of the DSM250 in which case an Alert Command Message is sent back to the Alert Source 8 1 Displaying Active Alerts Active Alerts are overlaid on all the favorite screens 10 af di 1 Alert s Pending 1 23 00 bs Le 20 50 a SS 76 00 Temp side 27 50 2 00 2th 16h 12h 6h Oh Figure 253 Alert Display The number of Alerts with pending operator actions is shown in the top right corner This will be colored red if the
184. gned to allow the input of relatively small radius values and may be displayed graphically through the Anchor Watch Display section 7 1 The radius of the Outside Radius Alert is specified in either Nautical Miles or Kilometers while the radius of the Anchor Alert is specified in Feet or Meters See Section 8 3 7 7 for details of the configuration of the Anchor Alert 8 3 7 10 Trigger Type is GPS Quality Alert The accuracy or quality of a position fix provided by a GPS is dependent on the number of satellites used to compute the position A position based on less than three satellites is considered a 1D lock three satellites is a 2D lock more than three satellites is a 3D lock and more than three satellites with SBAS is a 3D DGPS lock These different locks are indicative of the quality or accuracy of the given position with 1D having the lowest quality and 3D DGPS providing the highest quality The GPS Quality Alert is used to alert you if the quality of the position falls below a specified quality level 8 3 7 10 1 Trigger Configuration GPS Quality Alert Alert Detail Data Status Instance Any Description Location d Trigger Configuration Trigger Type aGPS Quality Re trigger Period 5 00 min sec Alert Set Point 3D GPS Alert Set Delay 0 06 min sec Alert Clear Point 3D DGPS Alert Clear Delay 0 06 min sec Local Audible Enable Figure 267 Trigger Configuration GPS Quality Alert
185. gs empty and full are required to calibrate rectangular tanks Up to 16 calibration points can be used for irregular shaped tanks 1 Use arrow keys to select current tank level 0 0 Gal 2 Press lt Accept gt to set calibration point 3 Press lt Complete gt once tank is full to set final calibration point Current Point MI 2345678 INDNPRBUNGBH Power Complete Increase Decrease Accept Figure 106 Empty Level Calibration Page 112 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Each time you press Accept during this process and after the Current Point highlight advances put more fluid into the tank and note the total volume of fluid pumped into the tank at this point Use the Increase and Decrease keys to set the current tank level to the appropriate value and then press the Accept key to store the current calibration point and advance to the next calibration point Figure 107 shows a screenshot of these intermediate calibration points Tank Levels Calibration Only two settings empty and full are required to calibrate rectangular tanks Up to D calibration points can be used for iregular shaped tanks 11 Use arrow keys to select current tank level 8 2 Gal 2 Press lt Accept gt to set calibration point 3 Press lt Complete gt once tank is full to set final calibration point Curent Point 16 345678 Oaunp0H pw Power Complete Increase Decrease Accept Figure 107 Intermediate Level Cal
186. guration Deviece Tnstance 0 Installation Description NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Restore Factory Defaults Scroll Scroll Power Ui Down Figure 143 RAA100 Advanced Configuration Menu 6 19 1 1 Device Instance This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the unit You usually will not need to modify the default value of O unless you have multiple units on the network 6 19 1 2 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value Revision 1 4 16a Page 139 DSM250 User s Manual 6 19 1 3 NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable The RAA100 Rudder Angle Adapter transmits the NUEA2000 PGN 127245 which can be turned on or turned off by the DSM250 display Pressing the Enter key with NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable menu item selected causes the DSM250 to display the following screen Figure 144 Configuration Device Configuration HA Manufacturer Model Sg HS SW D I Maretron RAA SN To 10 145 Advanced Configuration NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable LIA Hudder Figure 144 RAA100 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen You can enable or disable the tr
187. guring SBAS on a GPS200 The allowable option for SBAS configuration are either Disable which causes the GPS200 not to use SBAS satellites or Enable which causes the GPS200 to use SBAS satellites for developing a position fix Revision 1 4 16a Page 127 DSM250 User s Manual 6 16 Maretron IPG100 Configuration This describes the configuration of the Maretron IPG100 firmware version 1 0 0 The DSM250 is capable of configuring settings for the Internet Protocol Gateway IPG100 A screenshot of the IPG100 configuration menus is shown in Figure 128 below Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNF HW SWe 29 Maretron IPG 00 1620002 10 109 Advanced Configuration Device Label IPG 0002 N2KServer Password DHCP Yes IP Address 10 0 0 126 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 10 0 0 1 Default DNS 10 0 0 31 Figure 128 IPG100 Configuration Screen 6 16 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HW SWE 29 Maretron IPG 100 120002 10 10 69 Advanced Configuration Device Instance En Installation Description N2KServer Information Restore Factory Defaults Figure 129 IPG10
188. he analog gauge 6 11 5 Drive Trim Gauge Type The EMS100 comes from the factory preprogrammed with the characteristics of drive trim gauge types for supported engines If the EMS100 is used with an analog drive trim gauge you must select the correct type of gauge for this setting in order for the data to be displayed correctly Valid options are e No Gauge select this option if there is no trim gauge present e YANMAR Select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 11 6 Drive Trim Sender Type The EMS100 comes from the factory preprogrammed with the characteristics of drive trim senders for supported engines If the engine to which you are connecting the EMS100 has a drive trim sender you must select the correct type of drive trim sender for this setting in order for the data to be displayed correctly Valid options are e Disabled select this option if there is no drive trim sender present e YANMAR MERCURY Select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key Page 92 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 6 11 7 Drive Trim Sender Offset Often the characteristics of individual drive trim senders vary from their specified values This setting allows you to apply an offset to the resistance value of the drive trim sender in order to allow you to bring the digital value reported by the EMS100 into agreement with that displayed by the analog gauge Va
189. he device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea The Advanced Configuration Screen is shown below Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model Sg HW SWE di Maretron DS A9 PTS 10 A4 Advanced Configuration Device Instance p Installation Description NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Restore Factory Defaults Figure 123 GPS200 Advanced Configuration Screen 6 15 1 1 Device Instance The Device Instance will be used to identify the GPS200 device on the network Unless there are multiple GPSs on the network this should be left at Zero Page 124 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 6 15 1 2 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value 6 15 1 3 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable The GPS200 transmits several different messages which can be turned on or turned off by the DSM250 display Pressing the Enter key with NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable menu item selected causes the DSM250 to display the screen shown in Figure 117 Configuration Device Co
190. he port and starboard trim tabs are displayed on a dual bar graph A screenshot of the trim tab display appears in Figure 246 below Page 206 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Inm Tabs 47 01h _ agg Port Figure 246 Trim Tab Display 7 12 Swing Meter Display The DSM250 supports a swing meter display similar to those found on dedicated swing meters for displaying the rate of turn of the vessel in degrees per minute The swing meter is available in ranges of 30 minute 100 minute or 300 minute A screenshot of the swing meter display appears in Figure 247 below Rate of Turn emp Degrees Minute Figure 247 Swing Meter Display 7 13 Tank Gauge Display The DSM250 supports a tank level gauge display type which shows percentage of fluid remaining in a tank on an analog gauge with 180 of travel A screenshot of a tank gauge display showing a fuel tank s level appears in Figure 248 below Revision 1 4 16a Page 207 DSM250 User s Manual Tank Fuel Level Figure 248 Tank Gauge Display 7 14 Switch Breaker Display The DSM250 is capable of controlling loads controlled by a Maretron DCR100 DC Relay a Carling OctoPlex AC Box or DC Box or other NMEA 2000 load controller which uses NMEA Command of the 127501 Binary Switch Bank Status PGN for control The display may be set up in several different configurations Single Indicator Light this creates a single switch breaker
191. he value field which displays either Enable or Disable Use the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys to change the value to the desired value and then press the Enter key to accept the new value and store it within the J2K100 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model Sg HW SWE AS Maretron JK 1240008 10 10 11 Advanced Configuration Data Damping Fuel Rate 0 0s Tachometer 0 0s Device Instance 0 Installation Description J1939 Diagnostic Messages NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Restore Factory Defaults Figure 134 J2K100 J1939 Diagnostic Messages Configuration 6 17 1 5 NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable The J2K100 interface transmits several different messages which can be turned on or turned off by the DSM250 display Pressing the Enter key with NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable menu item selected causes the DSM250 to display the following screen Revision 1 4 16a Page 133 DSM250 User s Manual Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model Gd HWe SW BE Maretron DE ATI Tih 10 10 7 Advanced Configuration NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Engine Parameters Rapid Update Off Engine Parameters Dynamic E Transmission Parameters Dynamic Gen Avg Basic AC Quantities Scroll Scroll Up Down Figure 135 J2K100 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen Power You can enable or disable specific transmissions by scrolling or through the
192. he version of the Firmware running in the DSM250 Revision 1 4 16a Page 35 DSM250 User s Manual 5 2 5 Favorite Screens Mode The DSM250 supports two methods of operation in favorites mode Auto in which the DSM250 automatically cycles through all favorite screens that have been enabled for Auto mode and Manual in which the DSM250 continues to display the currently displayed favorite screen until you press the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys in which the DSM250 will display the next higher or lower numbered favorite screen respectively that is enabled for Manual mode Favorite Screens Mode ERIE Favorite Screens Setup Units Figure 24 Setting the Favorite Screens Mode 5 2 6 Favorite Screens Setup Menu The DSM250 supports the configuration of sixteen favorite screens The favorite setup screen allows you to select which of the sixteen favorite screens you wish to configure Favorite Screens Setup Favorite 1 Favorite 2 Favorite Favorite Favorite Favorite Favorite Favorite Favorite Favorite 10 Favorite 11 Favorite 12 Figure 25 Favorite Screens Setup Screen Once you have selected a favorite screen to configure you will see the screen shown in Figure 26 The exact format of the setup screen will depend on the Format chosen Page 36 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Favorite Screens Setup Favorite 1 1 Ei Favorite Mode HITCH BIM Format 4 Quarters Auto Chan
193. highest pending Alert is an Alarm and yellow if it is a Warning The description of the active Alert with the highest priority is shown at the bottom left of the screen This will be colored red if itis an Alarm and yellow if it is a Warning In addition the state of the alert 4 3 5 will be shown as follows Active The enclosing box will flash between a solid red or yellow and white Accepted The enclosing box will be a solid red or yellow Awaiting Cancel The enclosing box will be outlined in red or yellow as shown in Figure 253 8 1 1 Alert Status Screen The list of Active Alerts is displayed in tabular form on the Alert Status Screen This Screen may be displayed by selecting the Alert Status option from the Main Menu Page 212 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Alert s Pending 1 Source Pr Inactive Local 3 OT 10 46 49 Local 5 8 2 Accepting or Cancelling an Alert Active Alerts may be accepted 4 3 2 by the operator to indicate that the operator has taken responsibility for the Alert Alerts that have been triggered and the cause removed without being accepted by a user must be cleared 8 2 1 From a Favorite Screen The Alert with the highest priority that requires accepting or cancelling is shown at the bottom left of the screen see Figure 253 This Alert may easily be accepted or cancelled without changing screens by pressing the Power button 8 2 2 From the Alert Status Screen Alert s Pending 1 Source Pri
194. hown in below Because only one such mapping can take place each Transmission and each Engine on the J1939 network must have its own J2K100 Gateway The J1939 Source Address see section 6 17 4 identifies the transmission on the J1939 network the Transmission Instance indentifies the transmission to the NUEA2000 network Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HW SW AS Maretron JK 1240008 10 10 11 Advanced Configuration Device Label NMEA2000 Instance Engine d Transmission CU AClleemaker 0 J1939 Source Address Refresh J1939 source address list JHW SA None Figure 137 J2K100 NMEA2000 Transmission Instance Configuration Revision 1 4 16a Page 135 DSM250 User s Manual Use the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys to change the value to the desired value you wish to use as the transmission instance identifier and then press the Enter key to accept the value and store it within the J2K100 6 17 5 AC Icemaker Instance This entry allows a air conditioner or icemaker to be mapped to an NMEA2000 instance number Each air conditioner or icemaker on an NMEA 2000 network must have a unique instance identifier to allow display devices to distinguish it from other air conditioners or icemakers on the network The AC Icemaker menu item allows you to configure the air conditioner or instance identifier which will be sent over the NMEA 2000 network along with air conditioner or i
195. ibration Once the tank is completely full instead of pressing the Accept key to store the current calibration point press the Complete key This will complete the calibration process and will also adjust the tank capacity to the currently indicated level Figure 108 below shows the calibration screen at the last point with the full tank level and thus the tank capacity set to 101 gallons Tank Levels Calibration Only two settings empty and full are required to calibrate rectangular tanks Up to WD calibration points can be used for irregular shaped tanks 1 Use arrow keys to select current tank level 101 Gal 2 Press lt Accept gt to set calibration point 13 Press lt Complete gt once tank is full to set final calibration point Curent Point 12345 678 SWDNPEH phi Power Complete Increase Decrease Accept Figure 108 Full Level Calibration After you press accept a confirmation screen will appear showing completion of the calibration process and the new tank capacity value A screenshot of this calibration screen is shown below in Figure 109 Revision 1 4 16a Page 113 DSM250 User s Manual Tank Levels Calibration Only two settings empty and full are required to calibrate Tank Level Calibration Completed Successfully Tank capacity will be updated to 101 Gal Press any key to continue Curent Point 1234567 8 9WDNDBUB Power Complete Increase Decrease Accept Figure 1
196. iguration NA Manufacturer Model Sg HW SWe D3 Maretron SIM SW HAN 10 111 Channel 1 End Of Line Resistor Label Lobby Figure 163 SIM100 Channel Configuration Screen 6 21 4 1 Mode To be able to detect broken connections a SIM100 channel may be configured to detect an 8kO resistor at the end of the circuit in the open state In this case a fully open circuit will reported as a fault condition See the manual for details Valid Modes are Disable the channel is not being used End Of Line Resistor an open circuit is a fault condition No End Of Line Resistor an open circuit is not a fault condition Select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 21 4 2 Label A label may be assigned to a channel as an aid to identifying the channel over the network Typically this label will describe the function of the switch connected to the channel See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value Revision 1 4 16a Page 153 DSM250 User s Manual 6 22 Maretron SSC200 Configuration This describes the configuration of the Maretron SSC200 firmware version 2 0 11 Nine configurable parameters for the Maretron SSC200 solid state compass may be configured using the Maretron DSM250 display The Maretron SSC200 configuration menu can be seen in Figure 164 below Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNe HWe Swe 49 Maretron SL A0 IA 20 2
197. iguration gt Installation Descriptions e Display Settings gt Label Also use this function to copy settings from an old DSM150 DSM250 to a new DSM150 DSM250 when replacing the device Revision 1 4 16a Page 79 DSM250 User s Manual Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNe HW SW 13 0 H Maretron DS TH Te 10 Advanced Configuration Copy alarms settings from local display Copy device selection from local display Copy display settings from local display Copy favorite settings from local display Copy DST100 calibrations from local display Copy all settings trom local display abel Test Remote Device Selection Power Scroll Scroll p Down Figure 72 DSM150 DSM250 copy all settings from local display 6 8 8 Label The Label of the DSM150 DSM250 is used by the Alert System to identify the source of an alert Here the label can be changed using the method described in section 3 3 4 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HWe SW Tl Maretron DSM2 0 TE 10 13 0 Advanced Configuration Copy alarms settings from local display Copy device selection from local display Copy display settings from local display Copy favorite settings from local display Copy DST100 calibrations from local display Copy all settings from local display Label IEI Remote Device Selection Figure 73 DSM150 DSM250 Label Configuration Page 80 Revision 1 4 16a Maretro
198. igure 33 Amar Depth Speed Temperature Transducer Configuration Screen ccecceeeneees 47 Figure 34 Amar Transducer Advanced Configuration Gcreen 48 Figure 35 Calibrating the Airmar Speed Transducer Speed n nnnnnnnnnnennennnnnnnnnrnnrsnrnrrrrrrrrnrrnrsnene 49 Figure 36 Amar Temperature Transducer Water Temperature Calibration Screen senonnennen 50 Figure 37 Setting the Transducer Depth Offset in an Airmar Depth Transducer 51 Figure 38 Resetting the Amar Speed Sensor Trip Distance log 51 Figure 39 EP 30 Trim Tabs Configuration Sereen ccccccceccsecceeeceeeccesuecaeeceeeseeeseesaeeseeeseeeseeeaes 52 Figure 40 EP 30 Trim Tabs Calibration Opening Screen ccccecccecccececeeeeeeeeeeceeeseeeseeeaeeeeeeseeeaes 52 Figure 41 EP 30 Intermediate Calibration Gcreen cece eeseeeeeeseeeaeeeseeseeeseeseeeaes 53 Figure 42 EP 30 Calibration Success Message 53 Figure 43 ACM100 Configuration Sereen cccccccccceecceeecececeeeceeceeeceeeceeeseeesaeesessgeseeeseeseeeneeeseeeas 54 Figure 44 ACM100 Advanced Configuration Screen ccccccccceccceceseeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeseeeaeesseeseeeseees 54 Figure 45 ACM100 NMEA 20007 PGN Enable Disable Screen 56 Figure 46 Reset Total Energy Recorded Confirmation Gcreen 58 Page x Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Figure 47 ALM100 Configuration Gcreen 59 Figure 48 ALM100 Advanced Configuration Gcreen
199. ime causing it to become an nactive Alert or you may disable the alert causing it to become a Disabled Alert Should the condition trigger the alert again the alert will transition back to the Active state incrementing a counter which is displayed on the Alert Status Screen in the What Happened column Revision 1 4 16a Page 23 DSM250 User s Manual 4 3 6 Available Alert Classes The DSM250 has several classes of alerts depending on the parameter for which an alert is being configured Low Alert The alert will become active if the monitored value drops below the value in this alert for longer than the time specified in the Set Delay field High Alert The alert will become active if the monitored value rises above the value specified in this alert for longer than the time specified in the Set Delay field Data Unavailable Alert The alert will become active if the monitored value is not received or is received but with a value of Data Not Available for longer than the time specified in the Set Delay field On Alert The alert will become active if the monitored switch or flag becomes ON for longer than the time specified in the Set Delay field Off Alert The alert will become active if the monitored switch or flag becomes OFF for longer than the time specified in the Set Delay field Tripped Alert The alert will become active if the monitored circuit breaker becomes Tripped for longer
200. ine Oil Engine Room Exhaust Gas Freezer Heat Index Heating System Inside Live Well Main Cabin Outside Refrigeration Sea Transmission Oil User Defined _ Date UTC Date Moon Phase Sunrise Sunset Local Time UTC Time Twilight AM Twilight PM Transmission Gear Oil Pressure Oil Temperature Vessel Pitch Roll Trim Tabs Keel Watermaker Domete Status Display Wind Apparent Direction and Speed True Direction and Speed Ground Direction and Speed NMEA 2000 Parameter Group Numbers PGN Name Default Rate Response to Requested 26464 GN List Transmit and Receive PGNs 26996 roduct Gier e 26998 onfiguration Information Protocol PGNs SO Acknowledge NA SO Request NA SO Transport Protocol Data Transfer fe Transport Protocol Connection Management SO Address Claim le SIS 65240 SO Address Command 26208 NA lt gt gt ae gt gt 5010 til Phase B AC Power 5011 til Phase B AC Basic Quantities 5012 til Phase A AC Reactive Power Revision1 4 16 Page 241 Received PGNs us 1 Phase C Basic AC Quantities us 1 Phase B Basic AC Quantities us 1 Phase A Basic AC Quantities us 1 Average Basic AC Quantities til Total AC Energy NA til Phase C AC Reactive Power til Phase C AC Power til Phase C AC Basic Quantities NA til Phase B AC Reactive Power NA E RRE m gt DSM250 User s Manual 6 6 6 5021 Gen Phase C AC Basic Quantities 5022 Gen Phase
201. ing the DSM250 4 Remove the template from the mounting surface 5 Insert the 2 studs into the back of the DSM250 Page 2 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron a Make sure the studs are fully inserted into the back of the DSM250 but don t over tighten the studs b Do not use threadlocking compounds containing methacrylate ester such as Loctite Red 271 as they will cause stress cracking of the plastic enclosure 6 Insert the studs protruding from the back of the DSM250 through the mounting holes and secure with the provided hardware a Place the flat washer on the stud first followed by the lock washer followed by the knurled nut b Hand tighten the knurled nut Figure 1 Surface Mounting the DSM250 2 3 2 Flush Mounting the DSM250 NOTE When flush mounting the DSM250 ensure that the vent port a small hole near the NMEA 2000 cable connector is not covered or blocked Blocking the vent port will compromise the integrity of the seals on the unit and will void the unit s warranty The DSM250 can be flush mounted to any suitable surface as shown in Figure 2 The steps for this type of mounting are as follows 1 Attach the Flush Mount Template see Section 0 to the surface where the DSM250 is to be located a Make sure the template is level by using one of the horizontal lines as a guide b Scotch tape works well for securing the template c The maximum thickness of the mounting material should no
202. ings empty and full are required to calibrate Tank Level Calibration Completed Successfully Tank capacity will be updated to 101 Gal Power Complete Increase Decrease Accept Figure 209 Custom Tank Level Calibration Confirmation Screen 6 24 4 2 Rectangular Tank If you have a rectangular tank and you know the capacity of the tank you can easily calibrate the sender by using the Rectangular Tank menu item Figure 210 below shows this option highlighted Use the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys to move the highlight over this menu item and then press the Enter key Revision 1 4 16a Page 181 DSM250 User s Manual Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model So HW SW T3 Maretron TLM 400 AT Pi 10 114 Tank Levels Calibration Custom Calibration Rectangular Tank Figure 210 Rectangular Tank Selection The following screen will be displayed Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SHN HW SW T3 Maretron TLM 400 AT 1 10 114 Tank Levels Calibration Rectangular Tank Empty Tank Depth y 40 0 Full Tank Depth 2 0 Figure 211 Rectangular Tank Calibration Enter the distance from the face of the TLM100 sensor to the bottom of the tank for the Empty Tank Depth and the distance from the face of the TLM100 sensor to the top of the liquid when the tank is full for the Full Tank Depth After entering the values use the Back butt
203. inue to hold the power key the DSM250 will power down in approximately three seconds If you release the power key before these three seconds have elapsed the DSM250 will return to its current operational state Page 6 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Degrees Figure 6 Po werdown Countdown Screen 3 3 Keypad Essentials The DSM250 has a five key keypad located below the screen Each key has slightly different functions depending on the operating mode Figure 7 below shows the DSM250 keys and their names Power Lights Down Enter Key Key Key Key Figure 7 Keypad and Key Names In the normal viewing mode where your favorite screens are displayed the keys on the DSM250 keypad have the following functions Power Key turns the DSM250 off see section 3 1 on page 6 for details A momentary press of this key can also be used to accept or cancel an Alert see section 8 2 1 on page 213 for details Lights Key a quick press cycles the backlight brightness between three programmed brightness levels see Section 5 2 4 3 on page 32 for details while a long press cycles the DSM250 through 8 programmable color palettes see Section 5 2 4 4 on Page 32 Up Key switches the display from the current favorite screen to the next highest numbered favorite screen that is enabled for that particular mode Down Key switches the display from the current favorites screen to the next lowest numbered fav
204. ion 1 4 16a Maretron Table of Contents Me ASTM RE 1 SM Vu reel Ee tele EE 1 12 Firmware Ee AEN 1 to DSM290 E S ants t ta sccsoce sctorsetn pattoandinnetione vonatrasabe salt oseie set oenlo nett orate net evetesiece tenet oreeeseeorsieneeeusis 1 TA elle e UE 1 ACC EE 2 Ar En elen Le BOX ene an ae ee 2 2 2 Choosing a Mounting LOCATON EE 2 ZO Mounino MeD ONA E 2 291 SUNace Mounting Ne RER BEE 2 2 3 2 Flush Mounting the DSM250 sec iccn seve scsusnseacceanieaccnarveanoudevednwedevedesedevedeweddardeatsiaeseeddeedens 3 23 3 Gimbal MOUNTING ING RE RE AEN 4 2 4 Connecting the DSM250 rsrsrsrs aina REEE IATER ETE ATEAREN ENTRETER REEERE 5 24 1 Checking the CONNCCUOM EE 5 3 Operating ihe DSM250 asso smccaoosasecustesertatneasedacbaxeuGmelnevetiasesonetases onetosaineahoeusionatares oxaters ne oiia kee 6 oA TONDO MED NZS ON ME 6 oL TOMNI alm Blo 456 Oeae E E E E E E 6 D OVP Gu E T 3 3 1 Naviga ng IN a MENU xa sescot sence renderer cudgesee ome cendneteceeuiedscosciedecennedenonneeteencnsOexscenteeonarens 22 CHOOSI a Vue ee un ER EE 8 32399 Cla te ER ie Ee UE 8 394 Enennga TEE RETTEN 8 E un ee alen ee 11 A Favole oO NS a EA E IEE E E E E E 11 42 Categoriesand Data Ee 11 7 Ad e E 12 AZZ AC SONG l e 12 e E AC OU ae E te 13 A nein ele VAUGHN oa cscs eyes Seton so 9s oon E E EEE E EEEE E E E E 14 Be E 14 8 oe DOD ee 14 Beet NSC MOIS TOU OM e E E E 14 AO 6 Me E 14 OR nein EE 16 A210 EI Re EE 16 4 2 11 Fuel Management 1
205. is 0 6 12 4 1 13 Volume Label Program this parameter with a text string which identifies the particular volume parameter being monitored by this channel Maretron display products will display this label text when you are selecting data to display 6 12 4 2 Channel 0 Configuration Menu Two Independent Sensors Mode This section describes the Channel 0 configuration parameters when the FFM100 s operating mode has been set to Two Independent Sensors The Channel 0 Two Independent Sensors Mode menu is too large to fit on a single screen so it is shown in two separate screenshots below Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HWt SM 69 Maretron FFH 400 DIER 10 1121 Channel ei 3 Phase Engine Instance 0 Engine Label PORT ENGINE K Factor 1001 Data Damping Period 3 05 Reset Total Volume Recorded Temperature Instance 2 Temperature Source User Defined 129 Figure 93 FFM100 Channel 0 First Configuration Screen Two Independent Sensors Mode Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SHY HWE SW 69 Maretron FFM 400 179905 10 1121 Channel ei Temperature Instance 2 Temperature Source User Defined 129 Temperature Label PORT FUEL TEMP Fluid Type Fuel Flow Instance 0 Flow Label PORT FUEL FLOW Volume Instance ai PO Tae PORT FUEL VOLUME Figure 94 FFM100 Channel 0 Second Configuration Screen Two Independent Sensors Mode R
206. ited Warranty Maretron warrants the DSM250 to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for two 2 years from the date of original purchase If within the applicable period any such products shall be proved to Maretron s satisfaction to fail to meet the above limited warranty such products shall be repaired or replaced at Maretron s option Purchaser s exclusive remedy and Maretron s sole obligation hereunder provided product is returned pursuant to the return requirements below shall be limited to the repair or replacement at Maretron s option of any product not meeting the above limited warranty and which is returned to Maretron or if Maretron is unable to deliver a replacement that is free from defects in materials or workmanship Purchaser s payment for such product will be refunded Maretron assumes no liability whatsoever for expenses of removing any defective product or part or for installing the repaired product or part or a replacement therefore or for any loss or damage to equipment in connection with which Maretron s products or parts shall be used With respect to products not manufactured by Maretron Maretron s warranty obligation shall in all respects conform to and be limited to the warranty actually extended to Maretron by its supplier The foregoing warranties shall not apply with respect to products subjected to negligence misuse misapplication accident damages by circumstances beyond Maretron s control
207. ited to the list of Anchor Watch Alerts already created in the system 5 2 6 4 4 Title Each display type has a user defined title that is displayed above the control The contents of the title are specified in this field There are three options e Default the title of the control is the same as the name of the parameter being displayed e Label the label of the parameter The label is programmed into the remote device and will be transferred to the title when it is received from the remote device This means that if the label of the remote device is changed the title of the control will be automatically updated to match the new label e Custom the title is entered by the user using the method described in section 3 3 4 5 2 Units Menu The Units Menu allows you to set the desired display units for the DSM250 The following sections provide more detail on the individual unit settings Page 40 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Units WR Magnetic Jepth Feet Distance Nautical Miles Boat Speed Knots Wind Speed Knots Wind True Vessel Ref Ground Temperature F Atmospheric Pressure Inches Mercury Fluid Pressure Pounds Square Inch Volume Gallons Time Format 24 Hour Local Time Offset 0 00 Power Figure 31 DSM250 Units Menu 5 2 7 1 Heading This menu item allows you to select whether heading course and bearing information is displayed in true or magnetic measurements True heading can only be di
208. ive Power displays reactive power output by the generator Total Apparent Power displays apparent power output by the generator Total Power Factor displays power factor of the generator Total KWH Export displays total energy produced by the generator Total KWH Import displays total energy consumed by the generator Phase A Current displays phase A current of the Generator Phase A Frequency displays frequency of the AC power on phase A of the Generator Phase A L N Voltage displays phase A Line to Neutral RMS voltage of the Generator Phase AB L L Voltage displays phase A Line to phase B Line RMS voltage of the Generator Phase A Real Power displays real power output on phase A of the generator Phase A Reactive Power displays reactive power output on phase A of the Generator Phase A Apparent Power displays apparent power output on phase A of the Generator Phase A Power Factor displays power factor of phase A of the Generator Phase B Current displays phase B current of the Generator Phase B Frequency displays frequency of the AC power on phase B of the Generator Phase B L N Voltage displays phase B Line to Neutral RMS voltage of the Generator Phase BC L L Voltage displays phase B Line to phase C Line RMS voltage of the Generator Phase B Real Power displays real power output on phase B of the generator Phase B Reactive Power displays reactive power output on phase B of the
209. l n Power Figure 65 DSM150 DSM250 Remote Device Selection Screen The NA column of the menu displays the node address the device is using The Manuf column of the menu displays the manufacturer of the device The Model column displays the model number of the device The SN column displays the serial number of the device so that any of two or more devices of the same manufacturer and model number may be distinguished from one another The Stat column indicates whether the device is currently connected to the bus and is responding to queries Online or has been disconnected from the bus has lost power or for some other reason is not responding to queries Offline The Disp column indicates whether data from that particular device is accepted for display by the remote DSM150 DSM250 On or that the remote DSM150 DSM250 ignores data transmitted by this device Off By scrolling to the device and pressing the Enter key you may then use the Scroll Up i and Scroll Down keys to toggle the Display status for this particular device Once you are satisfied with the state of the Display setting press the Enter key to accept the setting The remote DSM150 DSM250 will retain information on devices that have been removed from the bus or powered down Offline so that when they are placed back on the bus they will assume their prior Display
210. l Reset the total energy recorded Maretron Annunciator ALM100 Set the Data Instance Number and the Label Test the alarm Maretron Direct Current Monitor DCM100 Set the Battery Type and calibrate the current sensor zero offset Maretron Direct Current Relay Module DCR100 Set the operating mode of each channel lock switches set power up state and control state of switches Maretron Monochrome Display DSM200 allows configuration of other DSM200s on the network Maretron Color Display DSM150 DSM250 allows configuration of other DSM150s and DSM250s on network Maretron Depth Speed Temp Transducer DST100 set transducer offset zero trip distance log Maretron Depth Speed Temp Transducer DST110 Reset trip log set depth offset speed calibration and temperature offset Maretron Engine Monitoring System EMS100 set the gauge types for Boost Pressure Drive Trim Oil Pressure and Water Temperature Preset the Engine Hours Maretron Fuel Flow Monitor FFM100 Set operating mode channel direction K factor temperature coefficient Maretron Fluid Pressure Monitor FPM100 Set the operating mode of each channel perform tank levels calibration set pressure sender characteristics Maretron GPS Antenna Receiver GPS100 enable and disable WAAS functionality set the GPS mode program the elevation PDOP and SNR masks set the antenna altitude force a cold start enable disable individual PGN
211. l NMEA 2000 PGN transmissions Maretron Tank Level Adapter TLA100 Set tank type and tank number set operating mode set tank capacity and calibrate for irregular shaped tanks Maretron Tank Level Monitor Shallow TLM100 Set tank type and tank number set operating mode set tank capacity and calibrate for irregular shaped tanks Maretron Tank Level Monitor Gasoline TLM150 Set tank type and tank number set operating mode set tank capacity and calibrate for irregular shaped tanks Maretron Tank Level Monitor Deep TLM200 Set tank type and tank number set operating mode set tank capacity and calibrate for irregular shaped tanks Maretron Temperature Monitor TMP100 Set device label and channel instance temperature source type and label Maretron NMEA 2000 to USB gateway USB100 allows configuration of USB100s on network Maretron Vessel Data Recorder VDR100 Set device label Maretron Ultrasonic Wind and Weather Station WSO100 set installation offset set wind damping rates and enable disable individual NMEA 2000 PGN transmissions More device types will be included in future firmware releases In each case the contents of the Device Configuration menus may vary depending on the version of the firmware within the device The Device Configuration menu is shown in Figure 32 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HW SW 62 Maretron SL AN 11200
212. l Scroll Up Down Figure 195 Configuring the Tank Type 6 23 7 Operating Mode The TLA100 can be operated in one of two operating modes depending on the installation e NMEA 2000 the only thing that is connected to the resistive sender is the TLA100 NMEA 2000 amp Analog Gauge in addition to the TLA100 the resistive sender is also connected to a dual coil analog gauge It is important that this setting be performed correctly in order for the TLA100 to produce correct level measurements A screenshot showing configuration of the operating mode appears in Figure 196 below To configure the operating mode use the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys to move the highlighted cursor over the Operating Mode menu item then press the Enter key to move the highlight over the operating mode value Use the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys to change the operating mode to the desired value and finally press the Entry key to confirm your selection and store the operating mode within the TLA100 Revision 1 4 16a Page 173 DSM250 User s Manual Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNe HWe Swe 2 Maretron TLA WO Pala Ti 10 16 4 Advanced Configuration Label Aft Fuel Tank Capacity 1 0 Gallons Tank Levels Calibration Tank Number S Tank Type Fuel Operating Mode IK Scroll Scroll Power Up Down Figure 196 Configuring the Operating Mode 6 23 8 Gauge Resistance
213. l other rudders A screenshot of rudder number configuration is shown in Figure 152 below In order to configure the rudder number use the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys to move the highlighted cursor to Rudder Number then press the Enter key to move the cursor over to the rudder number value Use the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys to select the desired rudder number Finally press the Enter key to confirm your selection and store the new rudder number within the RAA100 Page 144 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNF HWe SW 62 Maretron RAA 90 T5991 10 14 5 Advanced Configuration Label Stbd Rudder Angle Calibration Rudder Number ta n TE T Cig ere ie Operating Mode NMEA2000 Gauge Resistance to sender 135 Gauge Resistance to sender 199 Power Scroll Scroll Up Down Figure 152 RAA100 Setting the Rudder Number 6 19 5 Operating Mode The RAA100 can be operated in one of two operating modes depending on the installation e NMEA 2000 the only thing that is connected to the resistive sender is the RAA100 NMEA 2000 amp Analog Gauge in addition to the RAA100 the resistive sender is also connected to a dual coil analog gauge It is important that this setting be performed correctly in order for the RAA100 to produce correct angle measurements A screenshot showing configuration of the operating mode appear
214. level 8 2 Gal 2 Press lt Accept gt to set calibration point 3 Press lt Complete gt once tank is full to set final calibration point Curent Point 16 345678 IWDNPRBHEH Power Complete Increase Decrease Accept Figure 207 Intermediate Level Calibration Page 180 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Once the tank is completely full instead of pressing the Accept key to store the current calibration point press the Complete key This will complete the calibration process and will also adjust the tank capacity to the currently indicated level Figure 208 below shows the calibration screen at the last point with the full tank level and thus the tank capacity set to 101 gallons Tank Levels Calibration Only two settings empty and full are required to calibrate rectangular tanks Up to D calibration points can be used for irregular shaped tanks 1 Use arrow keys to select current tank level 101 Gal 2 Press lt Accept gt to set calibration point 13 Press lt Complete gt once tank is full to set final calibration point Curent Point 12345 678 SWDNPOEH OE Power Complete Increase Decrease Accept Figure 208 Full Level Calibration After you press accept a confirmation screen will appear showing completion of the calibration process and the new tank capacity value A screenshot of this calibration screen is shown below in Figure 209 Tank Levels Calibration Only two sett
215. libration Set to American Standard 240 33 ohm Set to European Standard 10 180 ohm Scroll Scroll Ur Down Enter Power Bach Figure 147 RAA100 Custom Rudder Angle Calibration The first step in the custom rudder angle sender calibration process is to turn the wheel hard over to starboard and to measure the angle or the rudder angle from center with a protractor or other instrument Use the Increase and Decrease keys until the highlighted rudder angle value is at the measured value and then press Enter to accept the value and store it within the RAA100 Figure 148 shows a screenshot of the starboard rudder calibration screen You may also press the Abort Key to end the calibration process Rudder Angles Calibration Three seperate calibration points are used to calibrate the rudder hard over starboard center hard over port 11 Turn wheel hard over to starboard 2 Use arrow keys to select rudder angle 3 Press lt Accept gt to set rudder angle at hard over port position 14 Press lt Abort gt to cancel calibration and revert to old calibration data Power Abort Increase Decrease Accept Figure 148 RAA100 Starboard Rudder Angle Calibration Page 142 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron The second step in the custom rudder angle sender calibration process is to turn the wheel so that the rudder is centered as much as possible Next press Enter to accept the value and s
216. libration of the Tank Level Adapter The first step in custom calibration of the tank level sender is to provide an estimated capacity of the tank This estimated capacity must be within 25 of the actual capacity To set the estimated tank capacity use the arrow keys to adjust the displayed value until the desired value is shown Then press the Accept key to confirm your selection and continue with the calibration process If you desire to stop the calibration process pressing the Back Key will end the process and return you to the Tank Levels Calibration menu Page 168 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Tank Levels Calibration 11 Use arrow keys to select estimated tank capacity 100 Gal 2 With empty tank press lt Accept gt to begin calibration process 3 Press lt Abort gt to cancel calibration and revert to old calibration data Power Figure 187 Tank Levels Calibration Capacity Estimation The next step in the calibration process is to fill the tank and indicate the volume of fluid in the tank at various points while filling the tank This process should be started with an empty tank You only need to indicate two calibration points for a rectangular tank and can use up to 16 calibration points for a tank with a more complex shape Figure 188 shows a screenshot of the first calibration step Enter the first calibration point with an empty tank 0 0 Gallons liters by pressing the Accept key The Cur
217. lid options are e 100 100 number of ohms of resistance to add to the sender reading select the required option using the Increase and Decrease keys followed by the Enter key 6 11 8 Oil Pressure Gauge Type The EMS100 comes from the factory preprogrammed with the characteristics of oil pressure gauge types for supported engines If the EMS100 is used with an analog oil pressure gauge you must select the correct type of gauge for this setting in order for the data to be displayed correctly Valid options are No Gauge select this option if there is no oil pressure gauge present YANMAR YANMAR W THRESHOLD YANMAR VDO YANMAR VDO W THRESHOLD Select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 11 9 Oil Pressure Sender Type The EMS100 comes from the factory preprogrammed with the characteristics of oil pressure senders for supported engines If the engine to which you are connecting the EMS100 has a oil pressure sender you must select the correct type of oil pressure sender for this setting in order for the data to be displayed correctly Valid options are e Disabled select this option if there is no oil pressure sender present e YANMAR e YANMAR VDO Select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 11 10 Oil Pressure Sender Offset Often the characteristics of individual oil pressure senders vary from their specified value
218. lt value of 0 Revision 1 4 16a Page 69 DSM250 User s Manual 6 6 1 3 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value 6 6 1 4 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable The DCR100 transmits a variety of the NMEA2000 DONS which can be turned on or turned off by the DSM250 display Pressing the Enter key with NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable menu item selected causes the DSM250 to display the following screen Figure 59 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HW SW A Maretron DCR Wo Ti G09 20 1113 Advanced Configuration NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable 7301 Binary Switch Bank Status Ou Pi Switch Bank Control THE Switch Indicator Status On haze DC Beaker Current On TEAM Annunciator L I Scroll Up Figure 59 DCR100 NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen 6 6 1 5 Restore Factory Defaults This option restores all settings on the device to their factory default state 6 6 2 Device Label This entry allows you to assign a text label to the device This label is visible in Maretron analysis and display products and allows you to easily identify the particular
219. match the pressure reading of the pressure transducer when it is sourcing a current of 4mA You can determine this value by examining the specification of the pressure transducer being used 6 13 2 1 4Pressure at 20mA Program this parameter to match the pressure reading of the pressure transducer when it is sourcing a current of 20mA You can determine this value by examining the specification of the pressure transducer being used 6 13 2 1 5 Tank Capacity In addition to indicating the fluid level within a tank the FPM100 also has the ability to be configured or programmed with the attached tank s capacity This way you will be able to view the tank s Capacity as well as the amount of liquid remaining anywhere on the vessel where there is an NMEA 2000 compatible display 6 13 2 1 6 Tank Levels Calibration In order for the FPM100 to indicate an accurate tank level it must know the geometry of the tank There are two methods of calibrating an FPM100 channel in Tank mode Page 110 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron e Custom Calibration use for non rectangular tanks also most accurate in any case but requires more effort e Rectangular Tank By inputting some dimensions of a rectangular tank the FPM100 is able to interpolate the volume of liquid from the bottom of the tank to the surface Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HWt SW 38 Maretron FPM 100 50999 10 10 1 Channel 49 Tank Levels
220. ms or products to achieve the intended results and for the installation use and results obtained from said programs or products No specifications samples descriptions or illustrations provided Maretron to Purchaser whether directly in trade literature brochures or other documentation shall be construed as warranties of any kind and any failure to conform with such specifications samples descriptions or illustrations shall not constitute any breach of Maretron s limited warranty Page 248 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Warranty Return Procedure To apply for warranty claims contact Maretron or one of its dealers to describe the problem and determine the appropriate course of action If a return is necessary place the product in its original packaging together with proof of purchase and send to an Authorized Maretron Service Location You are responsible for all shipping and insurance charges Maretron will return the replaced or repaired product with all shipping and handling prepaid except for requests requiring expedited shipping i e overnight shipments Failure to follow this warranty return procedure could result in the product s warranty becoming null and void Maretron reserves the right to modify or replace at its sole discretion without prior notification the warranty listed above To obtain a copy of the then current warranty policy please go to the following web page http www maretron com company warranty php Revi
221. ms the offset value into the DST110 such that all displays subsequently receive the offset information This means you don t have to program multiple displays each with the corresponding offset information as the information is stored at a single place at the source 6 10 7 Trip Log The DSM250 is capable of clearing the trip log counter within a DST110 depth speed temperature transducer You zero the trip log by pressing the Enter key with the Trip Log menu item selected which results in the screen shown Figure 79 Pressing the Accept key while the Reset menu item is selected will complete the operation Resetting the trip log zeroes the DST110 s trip log such that all displays receive a zeroed value i e you don t have to perform the operation from other DSM200 DSM250 locations Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SHY HW SWe Zi Maretron DST 10 e D235 511003 10 Advanced Configuration Clear Speed Calibration Clear speed Calibration Clear Temperature Offset 0 0 F Temperature Calibration Transducer Depth Offset 6 0 ft Trip Log 0 0 nm GUE Power Cancel Accept Figure 86 Resetting the DST110 Trip Distance Log Page 90 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 6 11 Maretron EMS100 Configuration This describes the configuration of the Maretron EMS100 firmware version 1 2 The EMS100 is configured to match the engine to which it is connected The EMS100 Configuration changes som
222. n 6 8 9 Remote Device Selection Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNF HW SWe Ti Maretron DSM250 100178 10 13 0 Remote Device Selection Na Manuf Model SN Stat Disp 21 Maretron GPS On hlaretron DSW Of On SA Maretron WwsoO Ww W21 Onl On 01 Maretron USB 0 7 02 Maretron DST M0 WMaretron Maretron Power Figure 74 DSM150 DSM250 Remote Device Selection Revision 1 4 16a Page 81 DSM250 User s Manual 6 9 Maretron DST100 Configuration The DSM250 is capable of configuring Maretron s DST100 for several different parameters including trip log resetting transducer depth offset and speed calibration This describes the configuration of the Maretron DST100 firmware version 1 0 1 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HW GW IN WMaretron DST 100 9005 10 10 th Clear Speed Calibration 1 000 speed Calibration Transducer Depth Offset 0 0 ft Trip Log 0 0 nm Reset Figure 75 DST100 Configuration Screen 6 9 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HW SW Maretron DST aw Halala 10 10 h2 Advanced Configuration Device Instance E Installation Descrip
223. n The DSM250 is housed in a waterproof enclosure IEC IP67 rating protected against the effects of temporary immersion in water and can be mounted in either an outdoor location or an indoor location 2 3 Mounting the DSM250 The DSM250 has three mounting options which includes surface mounting flush mounting or an optional gimbal mounting Maretron suggests a location at which the display can be viewed from a relatively straight angle and at which the keys are easily pressed 2 3 1 Surface Mounting the DSM250 The DSM250 can be directly mounted to any suitable surface as shown in Figure 1 The steps for this type of mounting are as follows 1 Attach the Surface Mount Template see Section 0 to the surface where the DSM250 is to be located a Make sure the template is level by using one of the horizontal lines as a guide b Scotch tape works well for securing the template c The maximum thickness of the mounting material should not exceed 174 using the provided mounting studs thicker surfaces can be accommodated but you will need to purchase longer studs 2 Drill the four mounting holes all the way through the mounting surface at the locations indicated on the Surface Mount Template a Use a 3 10 drill bit 3 Drill or cut a single hole for the electrical connector a Use a2 hole saw b You will probably want this hole to be large enough for your fingers so that you can connect or disconnect the cable without remov
224. n DS5M 50 9819 10 13 0 Advanced Configuration copy alarms settings trom local display Copy device selection from local display Copy display settings from local display Copy favorite settings from local display Copy DST100 calibrations from local display Copy all settings from local display Label Test Remote Device Selection l GT Scroll Power Up Down Figure 64 DSM150 DSM250 Remote Configuration Screen Enter 6 8 1 Remote Device Selection A DSM250 unit can be used to configure a remote DSM150 DSM250 to set which NMEA 2000 devices are selected for display on the remote DSM150 DSM250 unit In this manner multiple devices of the same type may be used on a NMEA 2000 network in a fail safe configuration For example a certain compass unit may be selected from several available compasses for display on the remote DSM150 DSM250 The Remote DSM150 DSM250 Device Selection Menu for an example network configuration can be seen in below WARNING Do not select multiple devices of the same type for display This will result in multiple and possibly conflicting readings Revision 1 4 16a Page 75 DSM250 User s Manual Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SHN HW SW 11 Maretron DM TH 1 10 1 0 1b 12 Remote Device Selection NA Manuf Model SN Stat Disp CT CET LE T On 50 Maretron USB 0 W111 Ou n H Maretron DSH250 109000 Ou n 49 Maretron SoC AN IM Onl On d Maretron GPS RN TH On
225. ndicates the parameter being displayed and the center of the screen shows the numeric value for the indicated parameter The bottom right hand corner shows the units Page 202 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 7 6 Rolling Road The DSM250 supports a Rolling Road or navigation highway display This display repeats transmitted navigation data from a primary navigator such as a chart plotter or a personal computer running navigation software Figure 240 below shows the favorites screen setup menu with the rolling road selected When the rolling road is selected the displayed navigation data the Type submenu changes to four Item submenus The rolling road display can show numerical displays of four navigation related data items in addition to the graphical display of boat position and progress towards the desired waypoint Favorite Screens Setup Favorite ei Favorite Mode Auto Manual Format Full Window Auto Change Interval 5 Seconds Window 1 Data Navigation Rolling Road BoB COG Item 1 S0G Item 2 ETA ltem 3 DTW Scroll Scroll Un Down Power Figure 240 Configuration of Rolling Road Display The following data items may be displayed on the rolling road display COG Course Over Ground SOG Speed Over Ground BTW Bearing to Waypoint DTW Distance to Waypoint VMG Velocity Made Good ETA Estimated Time of Arrival TTG Time to Go XTE Cross Track Error Set Drift BOD Bearing
226. nds will eliminate any temporary transitions of the input signal above the Low Alert Set Point lasting less than 5 seconds from triggering an alert Once the alert is triggered it becomes an active alert An alert remains active until e The input signals rises above the Low Alert Clear Point and the Clear Delay time has elapsed If the Clear Delay is set to zero then the alert immediately becomes inactive once the input signal falls below the Low Alert Clear Point The Clear Delay is used to reduce false or Spurious alerts e The user accepts the alert as shown in the example above Revision 1 4 16a Page 219 DSM250 User s Manual 8 3 7 2 2 Trigger Configuration Alert Detail Trigger Configuration Trigger Type ea Re trigger Period 3 00 min sec Alert Set Point 40 F Alert Set Delay 0 10 min sec Alert Clear Point 45 F Alert Clear Delay 0 10 min sec Local Audible Enable Tone Continuous Remote Annunciator s Operating Mode_Moored Enable Operating Mode_Underway Enable Figure 259 Trigger Configuration Low Alert Re trigger Period When you accept an alert it will change to the Accepted state and annunciators that are sounding for that alert will stop sounding If the condition which caused the alert remains true after the amount of time in this field the alert will return to the Active state and annunciators will begin sounding again for that alert If a value of 0 00 is en
227. nel s Function has been set to Tank mode The Channel 0 5 Tank Mode menu is too large to fit on a single screen so it is shown in two separate screenshots below Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model Su HN SW 9 Maretron FPM SN eG 10 10 1 Channel 49 Function Tank EFTTA AFT FUEL TANK Pressure at AmA 0 0 PSI Pressure at 20mA 5 0 PSI Tank Capacity 1893 Liters Tank Levels Calibration Tank Number e Tank Type Fuel Figure 101 FPM100 Channel 0 First Configuration Screen Tank Mode Revision 1 4 16a Page 109 DSM250 User s Manual Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SHN HW SW 58 Maretron FPM SN hos 10 10 1 Channel 49 Label AFT FUEL TANK Pressure at 4mA 0 0 PSI Pressure at 20mA 5 0 PSI Tank Capacity 1893 Liters Tank Levels Calibration Tank Number ei Tank Type Fuel Data Damping Period 3 De Figure 102 FPM100 Channel 0 Second Configuration Screen Tank Mode 6 13 2 1 1 Function You can set the channel s Function to Disabled Tank or Pressure Vacuum This section of the manual assumes that the channel s function has been set to Tank 6 13 2 1 2Label This entry allows you to assign a text label to the device This label is visible in Maretron analysis and display products and allows you to easily identify the particular device 6 13 2 1 3Pressure at 4mA Program this parameter to
228. nfiguration NA Manufacturer Model Sg HW SW 26 Maretron DS AN RO 10 A4 Advanced Configuration KEN PGN Enable Disable e reg cn Scandic Variation On Position Rapid Update On COG and SOG Rapid Update On GNSS Position Data On GNSS DOPs On GNSS Sats in View On Figure 124 GPS200 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen You can enable or disable specific transmissions by scrolling or B through the different transmitted messages and pressing the Enter key on the message to be configured Select whether you want the message to be transmitted On or disabled Off using the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 15 1 4 Restore Factory Defaults The DSM250 is capable of restoring all programmable settings on a Maretron GPS200 to the factory default condition You can choose this setting by pressing the Enter key with the Restore Factory Defaults menu item selected which causes the screen shown in Figure 118 to be displayed This will cause the GPS200 to set all programmable settings to the factory default condition Revision 1 4 16a Page 125 DSM250 User s Manual Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model Sg HW SWE 26 Maretron DS AN RO 10 A4 Advanced Configuration Device Instance 0 Installation Description NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Restore Factory Defaults Figure 125 Restoring Factory Defaults
229. ngle J1939 engine genset or a single transmission and the NMEA 2000 network This setting identifies the J1939 source address of the engine genset and a transmission for which the J2K100 will serve as a gateway For air conditioners or icemakers the J1939 source address refers to the source address of the air conditioner or icemaker on the AC Icemaker CAN network Page 136 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model Sg HW SWE AS Maretron JA 100 1240008 10 10 11 Advanced Configuration Device Label NMEA2000 Instance Engine d Transmission AClicemaker 0 J1939 Source Address i Refresh J1939 source address list JHW SA None Figure 139 J2K100 J1939 Source Address Configuration To set the J1939 source address use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys to move the highlighted cursor to the J1939 Source Address menu item Press the Enter key to move the cursor over to the source address value on the right as shown in Figure 139 above Then use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys to change the J1939 Source Address value until it matches the J1939 source address of the engine genset or transmissions for which you desire this J2K100 to translate data onto the NMEA 2000 network 6 17 7 Refresh J1939 source address list The configuration screen for the J2K100 will examine the bus to determine to which devices it can connect This is presented in a list at the
230. nnel Maretron display products will display this label text when you are selecting data to display 6 12 5 2 10 Fluid Type Program this parameter to match the type of fluid whose flow is being monitored 6 12 5 2 11 Flow Instance Program this parameter to match the desired instance number of the fluid flow reading for this channel You can program this parameter to any value between 0 and 252 The default value for this parameter is 0 Page 106 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 6 12 5 2 12 Flow Label Program this parameter with a text string which identifies the particular fluid flow parameter being monitored by this channel Maretron display products will display this label text when you are selecting data to display 6 12 5 2 13 Volume Instance Program this parameter to match the desired instance number of the volume reading for this channel You can program this parameter to any value between 0 and 252 The default value for this parameter is 0 6 12 5 2 14 Volume Label Program this parameter with a text string which identifies the particular volume parameter being monitored by this channel Maretron display products will display this label text when you are selecting data to display 6 13 Maretron FPM100 Configuration The DSM250 is capable of configuring the Maretron FPM100 Fluid Pressure Monitor This describes the configuration of the Maretron FPM100 firmware version 1 0 1 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manuf
231. not transmit any variation information and heading information will be available only in magnetic heading format Revision 1 4 16a Page 163 DSM250 User s Manual WARNING Magnetic variation changes as your location on the earth changes therefore magnetic variation should be adjusted with changes in position Neither the DSM250 nor the SC200 will make these changes automatically they are the responsibility of the user Page 164 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 6 23 Maretron TLA100 Configuration Maretron TLA100 tank level adapters on the network may be configured using the DSM250 This describes the configuration of the Maretron TLA100 firmware version 1 6 14 The TLA100 configuration menu is shown in Figure 181 below Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNF HWe SW 3 Maretron TLAW Fala Ti 10 Li Advanced Configuration abel Aft Fuel Tank Capacity 1 0 Gallons Tank Levels Calibration Tank Number S Tank Type Fuel Operating Mode NMEAZ2000 Scroll Power Down Figure 181 TLA100 Configuration Screen 6 23 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HWe Swe 3 Maretron TLAW KIK 10 16 4 Advanced Configuration
232. nsducer Depth Offset fu Trip Log 0 0 nm Reset Power Cancel Increase Decrease Accept Figure 37 Setting the Transducer Depth Offset in an Airmar Depth Transducer With the offset value highlighted you can change the offset by using the Increase and Decrease keys or Once you have selected the desired offset push the Enter key to complete the transducer depth offset calibration This procedure actually programs the offset value into the transducer such that all displays subsequently receive the offset information This means you don t have to program multiple displays each with the corresponding offset information as the information is stored at a single place at the source 6 1 10 Trip Log The DSM250 is capable of clearing the trip log counter within an Airmar speed transducer You zero the trip log by pressing the Enter key with the Trip Log menu item selected which results in the screen shown Figure 79 Pressing the Accept key while the Reset menu item is selected will complete the operation Resetting the trip log zeroes the transducers trip log such that all displays receive a zeroed value Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HWE SW 23 Airmar DST200 BEH H 127 i 1003 10 Advanced Configuration Clear Speed Calibration Clear Speed Calibration Clear Temperature Offset 0 0 F Temperature Calibration Transducer Depth Offset Trip Log 0 0 nm G
233. nsor label Set this entry to No to output zero for the fuel flow rate if the direction of fuel flow is opposite the direction of the arrow on the fuel flow sensor label 6 12 1 5 Channel 1 Allow negative flow Leave this entry at the default value of Yes for the FFM100 to output negative fuel flow values if the direction of fuel flow for the Channel 0 sensor is opposite the direction of the arrow on the fuel flow sensor label Set this entry to No to output zero for the fuel flow rate if the direction of fuel flow is opposite the direction of the arrow on the fuel flow sensor label 6 12 1 6 Differential Mode Allow negative flow Leave this entry at the default value of No for the FFM100 to output zero for the fuel flow rate if the computed net fuel flow rate is negative Set this entry to Yes for the FFM100 to output negative values for the fuel flow rate if the computed net fuel flow rate is negative 6 12 1 7 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later 6 12 1 8 NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable The FFM100 Fuel Flow Module transmits a number of the NMEA2000 PGNs which can be turned on or turned off by the DSM250 display Pressing the Ent
234. nted to any horizontal surface such a counter or ceiling as shown in Figure 3 The optional gimbal mounting assembly part number DSMMNTASSBLY includes a bracket and screws for attaching the bracket to the DSM250 a stand and 2 knobs for fastening the DSM250 bracket to the stand Page 4 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Figure 3 Gimbal Mounting the DSM250 2 4 Connecting the DSM250 The Maretron DSM250 provides a connection to an NMEA 2000 interface through a connector that can be found on the back of the unit The NMEA 20007 connector is a five pin male connector see Figure 4 You connect the DSM250 to an NMEA 2000 network using a Maretron NMEA 2000 cable or compatible cable by connecting the female end of the cable to the DSM250 note the key on the male connector and keyway on the female connector Be sure the cable is connected securely and that the collar on the cable connector is tightened firmly Connect the other end of the cable male to the NMEA 2000 network in the same manner The DSM250 is designed such that you can plug or unplug it from an NMEA 2000 network while the power to the network is connected or disconnected Please follow recommended practices for installing NMEA 2000 network products Pins Sockets Connector Threads Connector Threads Male Connector Female Connector 1 Shield 2 NET S power supply positive V 3 NET C power supply common V in 4 NET H CAN H 5 NET L CAN L
235. omplex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HW SWe 29 Maretron TMP 00 GI 10 111 Advanced Configuration Device Instance E Installation Description NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Restore Factory Defaults Figure 213 TMP100 Advanced Configuration Screen 6 27 1 1 Device Instance This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the unit You usually will not need to modify the default value of 0 unless you have multiple units on the network Page 184 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 6 27 1 2 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later 6 27 1 3 NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable The TMP100 Temperature Module transmits a number of the NMEA2000 PGNs which can be turned on or turned off by the DSM250 display For reasons of compatibility with older NUEA2000 devices some of these PGNs are redundant disabling these PGNs will reduce the amount of traffic on the NMEA2000 bus Pressing the Enter key with NMEA2000 P
236. on cccceceeseeeeeeeeeeeeneees 135 Figure 138 J2K100 NMEA2000 AC Icemaker Instance Configuration n nnannnnnoenoennennnnnneneennne 136 Figure 139 J2K100 J1939 Source Address Configuration cccccccceccceceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeaeeeaeeeaues 137 Figure 140 NBE100 Configuration Gcreen nanea a 137 Figure 141 NBE100 Advanced Configuration Gcreen 138 Figure 142 RAA100 Configuration Sereen ccccccsecceeececececcneecaeecseeceeeceeeceesauecaeesseeseeeceeseensages 139 Page xii Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Figure 143 RAA100 Advanced Configuration Menu 139 Figure 144 RAA100 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen 140 Figure 149 RAATOO0 Label CONG Ur AtIOM secsec se ninsa ee EE E E E E SEEE EEE 141 Figure 146 RAA100 Rudder Angle Calibration Options cccccccceccseeceeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeees 141 Figure 147 RAA100 Custom Rudder Angle Calibration ccccccccecccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeseesseeeeees 142 Figure 148 RAA100 Starboard Rudder Angle Calibration cccccccccccseeceecseeeseeeseeeceeeseeeaeeeeees 142 Figure 149 RAA100 Center Rudder Angle Calibration ccccccccccecccececeeeeeeeeeeceeeceeseeeseeeseeeeees 143 Figure 150 RAA100 Port Rudder Angle Calibration cece cccceecceeeceeeaeeeeeeeeeeceeeseeeseeeseeeseesaees 143 Figure 151 RAA100 Custom Rudder Calibration Confirmation Gcreen 144 Figure 1
237. on of a satellite above the horizon Satellites with 0 elevation are at the horizon while satellites with 90 elevation are directly overhead The GPS will exclude satellites with an elevation lower than the value of this parameter from the position solution 6 14 1 4 PDOP Mask The DSM250 is capable of setting the PDOP Mask on a Maretron GPS100 You can choose this setting by pressing the Enter key with the PDOP Mask menu item selected which causes the screen shown in Figure 115 to be displayed Page 118 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNe HW SW 21 Maretron GPS 211 21 20 1 Advanced Configuration Device Instance 211 GPS Antenna Altitude 0 00 m GPS Elevation Mask 7 5 GPS PDOP Mask GPS SNR Mask 28 00 dB Installation Description NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Restore Factory Defaults Cancel Increase Decrease Accept Figure 115 Configuring PDOP Mask on a GPS100 The allowable values for PDOP Mask are between 1 and 20 This number represents the Position Dilution of Precision which indicates the accuracy of the computed position and is a function of the positions of the received satellites If the PDOP of a given position solution is above the value of this parameter then the GPS100 will report that no fix is obtained Disabling the PDOP Mask by setting the value to will cause the GPS100 to report any position fixes obtained re
238. on page 199 Gauge see Section 7 3 on page 200 GPS Status see Section 7 4 on page 201 Numeric see Section 7 5 on page 202 Rolling Road see Section 7 6 on page 203 Line Graph see 7 7 on page 204 Weather Screen see Section 7 8 on page 204 Wind Rose see Section 7 9 on page 206 Moon Phase see Section 7 10 on page 206 Trim Tab see Section 7 11 on page 206 swing Meter see Section 7 12 on page 207 Tank Gauge see Section 7 13 on page 207 5 2 6 4 2 Instance Instance is used to specify which product on the network will be used as the source of the displayed information For example there may be two GPS s on the network each of which will have a unique instance assuming the network has been properly configured You use the instance field to tell the DSM250 which GPS to use for displaying data Most of the time the DSM250 simply displays a single parameter from a device on the network so you will only see one Instance entry There are other parameters that the DSM250 displays that are a combination of information from multiple products on the network For example fuel economy is a combination of fuel rate and Speed Over Ground SOG so you will see two Instance entries one to specify the engine s and one to specify the GPS for SOG 5 2 6 4 3 Alert In setting up the Anchor Watch display type this field is used to specify the associated Anchor Watch Alert priority The list from which the selection is made will be lim
239. on the GPS200 6 15 2 Cold Start GPS The DSM250 is capable of restarting the GPS algorithm on a Maretron GPS200 You can choose this setting by pressing the Enter key with the Cold start GPS Engine menu item selected which causes the screen shown in Figure 119 to be displayed This will cause the GPS200 to discard all position and satellite data and compute a position fix Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model Sg HW SWE di Maretron DS A9 PTS 10 34 Advanced Configuration Label SBAS WAAS EGNOS MSAS Enable Figure 126 Performing a Cold Start of the GPS200 6 15 3 Device Label A label may be assigned to the GPS200 as an aid to identifying the device over the network Typically this would describe the location of the GPS on the vessel See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value 6 15 4 SBAS WAAS EGNOS MSAS Enable Disable The DSM250 is capable of enabling or disabling the SBAS WAAS function on a Maretron GPS Antenna Receiver GPS200 You can change this setting by pressing the Enter key with the SBAS WAAS EGNOS MSAS menu item selected which causes the screen shown in Figure 121 to be displayed Page 126 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HW SW 2 Maretron DS AN SIN 10 10 6 Advanced Configuration Cold start GPS Engine Label eee ee ee ot Oe ee Disable Figure 127 Confi
240. on to return the parent menu 6 24 5 Tank Number The Tank Number is the Data Instance used in the data message This can be set from 0 to 15 6 24 6 Tank Type This is set to the type of fluid in the tank Values are Fuel Fresh Water Waste Water Page 182 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Live Well Oil Black Water Reserved 1 Reserved These values may be used when the contents of the tank does not fit into one of the categories above 6 25 Maretron TLM150 Configuration The TLM150 is the gasoline version of the TLM100 The configuration of the two devices is the same see Section 6 24 for details 6 26 Maretron TLM200 Configuration The TLM200 is the deep tank version of the TLM100 The configuration of the two devices is the same see Section 6 24 for details Revision 1 4 16a Page 183 DSM250 User s Manual 6 27 Maretron TMP100 Configuration Maretron Temperature Modules TMP100 may be configured using the DSM250 This describes the configuration of the Maretron TMP100 firmware version 1 1 1 The top level of the TMP100 configuration menu is shown below Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model Sg HWE SWE 29 Maretron THP 0 480009 10 111 Channel 9 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel en Device Label INSIDE BOX Figure 212 TMP100 Configuration Screen 6 27 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some c
241. ondition which caused the alert remains true after the amount of time in this field the alert will return to the Active state and annunciators will begin sounding again for that alert If a value of 0 00 is entered then the alert will never re trigger Alert Set Delay If the switch being monitored is in the Off state for the amount of time specified in this field the alert will become active Alert Clear Delay If the switch being monitored is in a state other than Off for the amount of time specified in this field the alert will become inactive 8 3 7 6 Trigger Type is Error Alert When monitoring circuit breakers the error alert can be used to raise an alert when the circuit breaker trips due to over current As with the On and Off alerts the Set Delay and Clear Delay values are used to prevent spurious triggering 8 3 7 6 1 Trigger Configuration Alert Detail Instance 0 PIH DC CKTS Channel 1 Lobby Description Location Trigger Configuration Trigger Type CID Re trigger Period 11 00 min sec Alert Set Delay 0 01 min sec Alert Clear Delay 0 02 min sec Local Audible Enable Tone Continuous Remote Annunciator s Revision 1 4 16a Page 223 DSM250 User s Manual Figure 263 Trigger Configuration Editor Tripped Alert Re trigger Period When you accept an alert it will change to the Accepted state and annunciators that are sounding for that alert will stop
242. onfiguration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HWe SW D4 Maretron RIM SN HAL 10 111 Advanced Configuration Device Instance fo Installation Description NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Restore Factory Defaults Figure 157 RIM100 Advanced Configuration Screen 6 20 1 1 Device Instance This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the unit You usually will not need to modify the default value of O unless you have multiple units on the network Page 148 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 6 20 1 2 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value 6 20 1 3 NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable The RIM100 Run Indicator Module transmits the NUEA2000 PGN 127501 which can be turned on or turned off by the DSM250 display Pressing the Enter key with NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable menu item selected causes the DSM250 to display the following screen Figure 158 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HWE SW D4 Maretron HIM 400 HiT 10 111 Advanced Configuration NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable ZUR Figure 158 RIM10
243. or a basic license e Inst Instance this field indicates the instance number used by this N2KView client e IP Address this field indicates the IP address of the N2KView client If it is followed by the letter E this indicates that the connection is encrypted e Label this field indicates the label assigned to the N2KView client Revision 1 4 16a Page 129 DSM250 User s Manual Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model Sg Hu 9 Maretron IPG AN BA 10 Advanced Configuration N2KServer Information Client List Lic Inst IP Address Label PD LIES Helm P 21 WOOMTE Lab Mumt 0 Figure 131 IPG100 Client List Display 6 16 1 3 2N2KServer Version This entry shows the version number of the N2KServer software currently running on the IPG100 6 16 1 3 3License Key Number This entry shows the serial number of the Hardware Licensee Key currently plugged into the IPG100 6 16 1 3 4Platinum Licenses This entry shows the number of platinum licenses in use followed by a slash followed by the total number of platinum licenses 6 16 1 3 5Basic Licenses This entry shows the number of basic licenses in use followed by a slash followed by the total number of basic licenses 6 16 1 4 Restore Factory Defaults This option restores all settings on the IPG100 device to their factory default state 6 16 2 Device Label Program this parameter with a text string which identifies this device Maretron dis
244. orite screen that is enabled for that particular mode Enter Key changes from favorite screens mode to menu mode In menu mode a legend appears along the bottom of the screen displaying the function of each of the keys The functions differ slightly depending on whether a menu is being accessed a selection is being made from a list of possible data values or a numeric value is being increased or decreased 3 3 1 Navigating in a Menu When accessing a menu the keys on the DSM250 keypad have the following functions Revision 1 4 16a Page 7 DSM250 User s Manual Power Key turns the DSM250 off see Section 3 1 on page 6 for details Back Key returns to the next higher level menu If already at the top level menu exits menu mode returns to favorite screens mode Menu levels are indicated with indentation of the text within the menus Scroll Up Key changes the currently selected or highlighted menu item from the presently selected one to the one immediately above it If the top menu item is already selected the selection wraps to the bottom menu item Scroll Down Key changes the currently selected or highlighted menu item from the presently selected one to the one immediately below it If the bottom menu item is already selected the selection wraps to the top menu item Enter Key if the currently selected menu item has a submenu opens that submenu If the currently selected menu item has
245. ose North Up Display Revision 1 4 16a Page 199 DSM250 User s Manual 7 3 Gauge Display The gauge display shows the selected data in a graphical format resembling an analog gauge There is a general gauge format for most types of display and a specialized rudder gauge display A full screen example of a tachometer display can be seen in Figure 236 below Engine Tachometer Figure 236 Gauge Display Example A full screen example of the rudder gauge display can be seen in Figure 237 below Figure 237 Rudder Angle Gauge Display Example Page 200 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 7 4 GPS Status Display The GPS Status display shows the following data about the selected GPS receiver GPS operating mode 2D 3D DGPS Satellite signal strength up to 12 satellites Satellite azimuth and elevation up to 12 satellites Position HDOP Time Date Accuracy of position An example of a full screen GPS Status display can be seen below in Figure 238 GPS Status 30 DGPS deed BERENS 26 29 298 N 82 00 761 W eee Alt 2m 02 11 2011 poor 34 Ace 15 2 m Figure 238 GPS Status Display Example Revision 1 4 16a Page 201 DSM250 User s Manual 7 9 Numeric Display The numeric display shows the selected parameter in a numeric format on the screen A full screen example of the current depth display can be seen below in Figure 239 Figure 239 Numeric Display Example The upper left hand corner i
246. ower factor of the utility Total KWH Export displays total energy produced by the utility Total KWH Import displays total energy consumed by the utility Phase A Current displays phase A current of the Utility Phase A Frequency displays frequency of the AC power on phase A of the Utility Phase A L N Voltage displays phase A Line to Neutral RMS voltage of the Utility Phase AB L L Voltage displays phase A Line to phase B Line RMS voltage of the Utility Phase A Real Power displays real power output on phase A of the Utility Phase A Reactive Power displays reactive power output on phase A of the Utility Phase A Apparent Power displays apparent power output on phase A of the Utility Phase A Power Factor displays power factor of phase A of the Utility Phase B Current displays phase B current of the Utility Phase B Frequency displays frequency of the AC power on phase B of the utility Phase B L N Voltage displays phase B Line to Neutral RMS voltage of the Utility Phase BC L L Voltage displays phase B Line to phase C Line RMS voltage of the Utility Phase B Real Power displays real power output on phase B of the Utility Phase B Reactive Power displays reactive power output on phase B of the Utility Phase B Apparent Power displays apparent power output on phase B of the Utility Phase B Power Factor displays power factor of phase B of the Utility Phase C Current displays phase C current of the
247. ping period that the J2K100 uses when sending fuel rate and tachometer engine RPM information The default is to use no damping 0 0 seconds You may program the damping from none up to 5 seconds Page 132 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 6 17 1 2 Device Instance The Device Instance will be used to identify the J2K100 module on the network If a GenSet is connected to the J1939 network and the AC parameters passed through the J2K100 interface the GenSet will also be identified using Device Instance number 6 17 1 3 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value 6 17 1 4 J1939 Diagnostic Messages The J2K100 can optionally pass through J1939 diagnostic messages used to indicate fault conditions on engines and transmissions from the J1939 interface to the NUEA2000 network so that NMEA 2000 connected displays can interpret these diagnostic codes To change the transmission status of the J1939 diagnostic messages use the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys to move the highlighted cursor to the J1939 Diagnostic Messages menu item Then press the Enter key to move the highlight to t
248. play products will display this label text when you are selecting data to display The default device label is blank 6 16 3 N2KServer Password Program this parameter with a text password Any connecting N2KView clients must be programmed with the same password in the Connections Settings gt N2KServer Connection gt Password field in the N2KView software The default password is blank Page 130 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 6 16 4 DHCP This parameter determines whether or not the IPG100 obtains its LAN connection settings from a DHCP server on the local area network When set to Yes the default value the IPG100 will obtain all necessary connection settings IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway and Default DNS from a DHCP server on the local area network Most routers have the capability to act as a DHCP server Consult the user documentation for your network s router for details If there is no DHCP server on the local area network or if the IPG100 is connected directly to a DSM800 or directly to an MBB100 set the DHCP parameter to No and manually configure the IP Address section 6 16 5 Subnet Mask section 6 16 6 Default Gateway section 6 16 7 Default DNS section 6 16 8 6 16 5 IP Address This parameter is the IP Internet Protocol address used by the IPG100 You will need to specify this address to N2KView clients in order to allow them to connect to the IPG100 If the DHCP par
249. played value and stores it 3 3 4 Entering a Textual Value When entering a text string the following menu will be presented Page 8 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron ext Anchor Winch_ Uppercase D Lowercase a Numeric 0 sign space gt Back lt Exit without saving Save amp Exit Figure 8 Entering a Textual Value The top line contains the textual string that has already been entered New characters are appended one at a time to the end of the line at the position marked by the underscore To append an uppercase character use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons to select Uppercase and then press Enter to go across to the characters Now use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons again to select the required character and press Enter to transfer the character to the cursor position If another uppercase character is required repeat this last step or press the Back button top return to the choices on the left To append a lowercase character use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons to select Lowercase and then press Enter to go across to the characters Now use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons again to select the required character and press Enter to transfer the character to the cursor position If another lowercase character is required repeat this last step or press the Back button top return to the choices on the left To append a numeral use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons to select Numeric an
250. points for a tank with a more complex shape Figure 206 shows a screenshot of the first calibration step Enter the first calibration point with an empty tank 0 0 Gallons liters by pressing the Accept key The Current Point highlight will advance to the next point Tank Levels Calibration Only two settings empty and full are required to calibrate rectangular tanks Up to calibration points can be used for irregular shaped tanks 1 Use arrow keys to select current tank level 0 0 Gal 2 Press lt Accept gt to set calibration point 3 Press lt Complete gt once tank is full to set final calibration point Current Point Bl 2 3456 TR IWDNPBUHH HK Power Complete Increase Decrease Accept Figure 206 Empty Level Calibration Each time you press Accept during this process and after the Current Point highlight advances put more fluid into the tank and note the total volume of fluid pumped into the tank at this point Use the Increase and Decrease keys to set the current tank level to the appropriate value and then press the Accept key to store the current calibration point and advance to the next calibration point Figure 207 shows a screenshot of these intermediate calibration points Tank Levels Calibration Only two settings empty and full are required to calibrate rectangular tanks Up to calibration points can be used for iregular shaped tanks 1 Use arrow keys to select current tank
251. ppears on the flow sensor connected to this channel 6 12 5 1 3 Temp Coefficient Program this entry with the coefficient of expansion of the fluid being monitored in order to properly compensate for thermal expansion of the fluid as it is heated while passing through the engine The default value for this parameter is 0 033 C which corresponds to Diesel fuel This parameter is not available when the Operating Mode is set to Two Individual Flow Sensors 6 12 5 1 4 Temperature Instance Program this parameter to match the desired instance number of the temperature reading for this channel You can program this parameter to any value between 0 and 252 The default value for this parameter is 0 6 12 5 1 5 Temperature Source Program this parameter to match the desired source type of the temperature reading for this channel The default value for this parameter is 129 User Defined 6 12 5 1 6 Temperature Label Program this parameter with a text string which identifies the particular temperature parameter being monitored by this channel Maretron display products will display this label text when you are selecting data to display Page 104 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 6 12 5 2 Channel 0 Configuration Menu Two Independent Sensors Mode This section describes the Channel 0 configuration parameters when the FFM100 s operating mode has been set to Two Independent Sensors The Channel 0 Two Independent Sensors Mode menu is
252. pports a single screen weather display that shows a wide variety of weather related information A screen shot of the weather display appears in Figure 243 below Page 204 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 15 22 41 02 11 2011 Ground ois 3 Pr can 31 00 3 00 80 F 54 beide er Faint SE bret C di h iar Oh C 12 06 23 17 Baro meter Moon Mase T Seet Figure 243 Weather Display The weather display shows the following information Wind Direction Ground Referenced Wind Speed Ground Referenced Heat Index Wind Chill Outside Temperature Outside Humidity Barometric Pressure Inside Temperature Inside Humidity Dew Point Moon Phase Sunrise Sunset Revision 1 4 16a Page 205 DSM250 User s Manual 7 9 Wind Rose The DSM250 supports a wind rose display which displays apparent wind direction and speed measured relative to the moving vessel or true wind direction and speed measured relative to the moving vessel depending on the parameter selected A screen shot of a wind rose appears in Figure 244 below Figure 244 Wind Rose Display 7 10 Moon Phase Display The DSM250 supports a moon phase display which shows the current phase of the moon at the current location An example screenshot of the moon phase display appears in Figure 245 below Moon Phase Last Quarter Figure 245 Moon Phase Display 7 11 Trim Tab Display The DSM250 supports a trim tab display in which the relative positions of t
253. process provides a method for the actual STW reading produced by the DST100 to be adjusted within the DSM250 e calibration data is not stored within the DST100 WARNING Unlike resetting the trip log and setting the depth offset which actually programs the DST100 so that all displays receive the same information speed calibration must be performed at individual displays in order to show calibrated speed through water 6 9 4 Transducer Depth Offset The DSM250 can set the transducer depth offset parameter in a DST100 depth speed temperature transducer If you are interested in the actual water depth as opposed to the depth beneath the keel then you should program a positive value equal to the distance from the waterline to the depth of the DST100 The DSM250 will then add the measured depth of the water as seen by the DST100 to the programmed offset value to produce the total water depth If you are interested in the depth of water beneath the keel then you should program a negative value equal to the distance between the DST100 and the bottom of the keel The DSM will then subtract the programmed offset from the measured depth of the water as seen by the DST100 showing you the depth of water beneath the keel You program the transducer depth offset by pressing the Enter key with the Transducer Depth Offset menu item selected which results in the screen shown in Figure 78 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacture
254. r Model SNz HWe SW 0E Waretron DSTO D 508A DAS Sty 300 Advanced Configuration Clear Speed Calibration 1 000 speed Calibration oo Transducer Depth Offset Trip Log 0 0 nm Reset Cancel Increase Decrease Accept Figure 78 Setting the Transducer Depth Offset in a DST100 With the offset value highlighted you can change the offset by using the Increase and Decrease keys or Once you have selected the desired offset push the Enter key to complete the transducer depth offset calibration This procedure actually programs the offset value into the DST100 such that all displays subsequently receive the offset information This means you don t have to program multiple displays each with the corresponding offset information as the information is stored at a single place at the source 6 9 5 Trip Log The DSM250 is capable of clearing the trip log counter within a DST100 depth speed temperature transducer You zero the trip log by pressing the Enter key with the Trip Log menu item selected which results in the screen shown Figure 79 Pressing the Accept key while the Page 84 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Reset menu item is selected will complete the operation Resetting the trip log zeroes the DST100 s trip log such that all displays receive a zeroed value i e you don t have to perform the operation from other DSM200 DSM250 locations Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Mod
255. r to Section Error Reference source not found for details e Font Size Sets the size of the font used to display the label on the switch breaker You may select Small Medium or Large default e Restore Factory Defaults This restores the switch breaker to factory default settings In order to control a switch breaker using the DSM250 create a screen with a switch breaker which has been configured to refer to the switch bank instance and indicator number of the switch breaker you want to control In normal operating mode use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys to change to the screen containing the switch breaker Once that screen is displayed follow these steps to change a load s state 1 Press the Enter key for approximately one second This will place the display into Control mode and one of the switches breakers on the screen will be highlighted with a thick border as shown in Figure 252 below 2 If there is more than one switch breaker on the screen you may use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys to change the highlight to a different switch breaker 3 Once the switch breaker for the load you want to control is selected then press the Power key The load referenced by the switch breaker will be commanded to change state and the changed state will be reflected in the switch breaker 4 To change other loads repeat the process 5 To stop controlling loads press the Li
256. re Factory Defaults Figure 56 DCR100 Advanced Configuration Screen 6 6 1 1 Current Sensor Zero Offset Calibration The DCR100 contains Hall effect current sensors In order to ensure maximum accuracy you should perform this calibration step while there is no current flowing through the current sensors Move the Page 68 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron highlight bar to the Current Sensor Zero Offset Calibration and press the Enter button The following confirmation screen will be displayed Current Sensor Zero Offset Cal You are about to zero out all 6 channels current sensors If you do not want to do this press lt Cancel gt Otherwise press lt Begin gt which will automatically turn off all 6 channels and automatically zero offset calibrate all the current sensors Power Cancel Figure 57 DCR100 Current Sensor Zero Offset Calibration Screen Press Begin to execute the calibration process or Cancel to return to the previous menu During the calibration process all channels will be turned off When the calibration is complete the following screen will be displayed Current Sensor Zero Offset Cal status Calibration Completed Figure 58 DCR100 Current Sensor Zero Offset Calibration Completion Screen Press the Back button to return to the previous menu 6 6 1 2 Device Instance This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the unit You usually will not need to modify the defau
257. reading for this channel You can program this parameter to any value between 0 and 252 The default value for this parameter is 0 6 12 4 2 14 Volume Label Program this parameter with a text string which identifies the particular volume parameter being monitored by this channel Maretron display products will display this label text when you are selecting data to display 6 12 5 Channel 1 This submenu contains configuration parameters for Channel 1 This menu looks different depending on whether the FFM100 s operating mode has been set to Differential or Two Independent Sensors 6 12 5 1 Channel 1 Differential Mode This section describes the Channel 1 configuration parameters when the FFM100 s operating mode has been set to Differential Revision 1 4 16a Page 103 DSM250 User s Manual Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNF HN SWe 69 Maretron FFH 400 DIER 10 1121 Channel 1 ETO Return K Factor 1001 Temp Coefficient Diesel 0 083 C Temperature Instance 2 Temperature Source User Defined 129 Temperature Label STBD FUEL TEMP Figure 95 FFM100 Channel 1 Configuration Screen Differential Mode 6 12 5 1 1 Channel Supply Return If the Operating Mode is set to Differential you may select whether the Channel 1 fuel flow sensor is connected to the supply or the return fuel line 6 12 5 1 2K Factor Program this parameter to match the K factor that a
258. rection by more than the Offset Wind Direction Set Point for longer than the time specified in the Set Delay field Timer Alert The alert will become active when the time reaches the time specified in the Alarm Time field and thereafter after the intervals specified in the Repeat Interval field Page 24 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 5 Operating Modes The DSM250 has two main operating modes including normal viewing of information in the favorite screens mode Section 5 1 and the menu mode Section 5 2 5 1 Favorite screens modes After the power up screen see Section 3 1 the DSM250 always enters the favorite screens mode In the favorite screens modes the DSM250 displays one of up to sixteen favorite screens Each favorite screen can display one two three or four information displays Each information display can show any displayable data in any display type supported by that data In favorite screens mode the DSM250 can operate in one of two ways Manual mode a particular favorite screen remains on the display until you select another one or Auto mode the DSM250 automatically cycles between favorite screens at time intervals which are individually programmable for each favorite screen An example screen of the DSM250 running in favorite screens mode can be seen in Figure 9 below Engine Coolant Temp Engine Tachometer Figure 9 DSM250 Running in Favorite Screens Mode The very
259. reen Press Accept to reset the value or Cancel to return to the previous screen Page 58 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 6 4 Maretron ALM100 Configuration This describes the configuration of the Maretron ACM100 firmware version 1 0 5 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model Sg HW SW 105 D Maretron ALM 400 HN 10 Instance 0 Label Bridge Test Annunciator Figure 47 ALM100 Configuration Screen 6 4 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HWE SW D Maretron ALM 400 Gau 10 10 5 Advanced Configuration Device Instance TS Installation Description NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Restore Factory Defaults Figure 48 ALM100 Advanced Configuration Screen 6 4 1 1 Device Instance This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the unit You usually will not need to modify the default value of 0 unless you have multiple units on the network 6 4 1 2 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was R
260. rent Point highlight will advance to the next point Tank Levels Calibration Only two settings empty and full are required to calibrate rectangular tanks Up to calibration points can be used for iregular shaped tanks 11 Use arrow keys to select current tank level 0 0 Gal 2 Press lt Accept gt to set calibration point 3 Press lt Complete gt once tank is full to set final calibration point Curent Point Bl 2 34567 8 IDNPRBHBSEK Power Complete Increase Decrease Accept Figure 188 S Empty Level Calibration Each time you press Accept during this process and after the Current Point highlight advances put more fluid into the tank and note the total volume of fluid pumped into the tank at this point Use the Increase and Decrease keys to set the current tank level to the appropriate value and then press the Accept key to store the current calibration point and advance to the next calibration point Figure 189 shows a screenshot of these intermediate calibration points Revision 1 4 16a Page 169 DSM250 User s Manual Tank Levels Calibration Only two settings empty and full are required to calibrate rectangular tanks Up to calibration points can be used for irregular shaped tanks 1 Use arrow kevs to select current tank level 8 2 Gal 2 Press lt Accept gt to set calibration point 3 Press lt Complete gt once tank is full to set final calibration point
261. rer Model SH HWE SW 73 Maretron TLM 400 AT a 10 114 Tank Levels Calibration Custom Calibration Rectangular Tank Figure 204 Performing Custom Calibration of the Tank Level Monitor The first step in custom calibration of the tank level monitor is to provide an estimated capacity of the tank This estimated capacity must be within 25 of the actual capacity To set the estimated tank Capacity use the Increase and Decrease keys to adjust the displayed value until the desired value is shown Then press the Accept key to confirm your selection and continue with the calibration process If you desire to stop the calibration process pressing the Abort key will end the process and return you to the Tank Levels Calibration menu Tank Levels Calibration 1 Use arrow keys to select estimated tank capacity 81 4 Gal 2 With empty tank press lt Accept gt to begin calibration process 3 Press lt Abort gt to cancel calibration and revert to old calibration data Power Abort Increase Decrease Accept Figure 205 Tank Levels Calibration Capacity Estimation Revision 1 4 16a Page 179 DSM250 User s Manual The next step in the calibration process is to fill the tank and indicate the volume of fluid in the tank at various points while filling the tank This process should be started with an empty tank You only need to indicate two calibration points for a rectangular tank and can use up to 16 calibration
262. ress the Enter button The following confirmation screen will be displayed Current Sensor Zero Offset Cal You are about to zero out your current sensor lf you do not want to do this press lt Cancel gt Make sure no current is flowing through the current sensor and press lt Begin gt to start calibration Power Cancel Figure 53 Current Sensor Zero Offset Calibration Confirmation Screen Make sure that no current is flowing through the sensor and press Begin to execute the calibration process or Cancel to return to the previous menu When the calibration is complete the following screen will be displayed Current Sensor Zero Offset Cal status Calibration Completed Figure 54 Current Sensor Zero Offset Calibration Complete Screen Press the Back button to return to the previous menu Page 64 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 6 5 3 DC Type You can configure the DCM100 as to what type of DC power source it is monitoring With the exception of the Battery type the value of this parameter is used only for reporting the power source type over the NMEA 2000 network However if you select the Battery type many battery related options become available The following DC Types are selectable e Battery e Alternator e Convertor e Solar Cell e Wind Generator If the DC Type is set to battery then the following options may be entered to characterize the battery and allow the estimation of remainin
263. rite Screens Setup Favorite 16 Windows 1 NAV LIGHTS switch B reaker Q Switch Breaker 1 C MAN ELECT ETER i ff Gray Color On Green O VHF RADIO Color Error Red Type Toggle Switch Instance ei HELM RELAY BOX Channel 1 HELM LIGHTS Title Label HELM LIGHTS Font Size Large Figure 251 Configuration of an Individual Switch Breaker Each switch breaker has several configurable parameters e Color Off select the color to be displayed when the controlled load is in the OFF state The default color is gray e Color On select the color to be displayed when the controlled load is in the ON state The default color is green Revision 1 4 16a Page 209 DSM250 User s Manual e Color Error select the color to be displayed when the controlled load is in the ERROR state which may indicate a tripped breaker The default color is red e Type you may choose between the default value of Toggle in which case the switch breaker changes state every time you press the power button while it is highlighted or Momentary in which case the switch breaker is turned on only while you are pressing the power button while it is highlighted e Instance the instance number of the switch bank containing the switch breaker to be controlled e Channel the channel number of the switch breaker to be controlled e Title Sets the text string to be displayed on the switch breaker Please refe
264. rm these measurements A screenshot of the to sender gauge resistance configuration is shown in Figure 198 below Page 174 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron To program the to sender gauge resistance use the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys to move the highlighted cursor over the Gauge Resistance to Gender menu item Then press the Enter key to move the highlight over the numerical resistance value Use the Increase and Decrease keys to change the value to the measured resistance value and finally press the Enter key to confirm your selection and store the value within the TLA100 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNz HW SW 3 Maretron TLAW AE Di 10 1b 4 Advanced Configuration Label Aft Fuel Tank Capacity 1 0 Gallons Tank Levels Calibration Tank Number G Tank Type Fuel Operating Mode NMEA2000 amp Analog Gauge Gauge Resistance to sender 25 Gauge Resistance to sender KIYI Cancel Increase Decrease Accept Figure 198 Configuring the to Sender Gauge Resistance Revision 1 4 16a Page 175 DSM250 User s Manual 6 24 Maretron TLM100 Configuration The DSM250 may be used to configure and calibrate the Tank Level Monitor TLM100 TLM150 TLM200 This describes the configuration of firmware version 1 1 4 After selecting the TLM100 from the list of devices on the network the following screen will be displayed Configuration D
265. rminology consistent with International Maritime Organization Code on Alarms and Indicators is used in N2KView and the DSM250 e Accept The user action of acknowledging the existence of an alert Alerts are only accepted when they are Active e Cancel The user action of removing an alert from the list of displayed alerts Alerts may only be cancelled if the condition causing the alert has been removed e Clear An alert is cleared when the condition causing the alert is removed This is not a user action e Trigger An alert is triggered when the condition monitored by the alert is met 4 3 3 Alert Priority Each alert has a priority which you can define ranging from O to 4000 with O the highest or most important priority and 4000 the lowest or least important priority Alarms always have a higher priority than Warnings i e an Alarm with a priority of 4000 has a higher priority than a warning with priority 4 3 4 Vessel Alert Operating Modes You can configure alerts to operate in one or more fixed operating modes 1 disabled 2 moored 3 underway or 4 anchored This allows you to easily enable or disable groups of individual alarms depending on the vessel s operating mode Setting the vessel alert operating mode is described in section 8 6 The Operating Mode is one of Page 22 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Disabled All alerts are disabled This mode should be used when the vessel is in storage dry dock or otherwise o
266. ry default state 6 4 2 Instance From here the instance number used in the Annunciator message may be set 6 4 3 Label A label may be assigned to the ALM100 as an aid to identifying the device over the network Typically this label will describe the location of the ALM100 See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value Page 60 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 6 4 4 Test Annunciator The Annunciator may be tested by scrolling the cursor to highlight this entry and then pressing the Enter button The ALM100 will emit a single beep Revision 1 4 16a Page 61 DSM250 User s Manual 6 5 Maretron DCM100 Configuration This describes the configuration of the Maretron ACM100 firmware version 1 0 4 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HW SWe B4 Maretron DCM 100 HHI 10 Advanced Configuration 104 Current Sensor Zero Offset Calibration DC Type Battery Instance ei Label NZ DIS Figure 50 DCM100 Configuration Screen 6 5 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model sH HW SW B4 Maretron DCM 100 GZ 10 104 Advanced Configuration Current Sensor de 200A Device Instance 2 Installation Descrip
267. s This setting allows you to apply an offset to the resistance value of the oil pressure sender in order to allow you to bring the digital value reported by the EMS100 into agreement with that displayed by the analog gauge Valid options are e 100 100 number of ohms of resistance to add to the sender reading select the required option using the Increase and Decrease keys followed by the Enter key Revision 1 4 16a Page 93 DSM250 User s Manual 6 11 11 Water Temperature Gauge Type The EMS100 comes from the factory preprogrammed with the characteristics of water temperature gauge types for supported engines If the EMS100 is used with an analog water temperature gauge you must select the correct type of gauge for this setting in order for the data to be displayed correctly Valid options are e No Gauge select this option if there is no water temperature gauge present e YANMAR e YANMAR VDO Select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 11 12 Water Temperature Sender Type The EMS100 comes from the factory preprogrammed with the characteristics of water temperature senders for supported engines If the engine to which you are connecting the EMS100 has a water temperature sender you must select the correct type of water temperature sender for this setting in order for the data to be displayed correctly Valid options are e Disabled select this option if there is no wa
268. s You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value Revision 1 4 16a Page 29 DSM250 User s Manual 5 2 4 1 2 Primary Device Selection Not all the data displayed by the DSM250 can be taken directly off the NMEA 2000 bus Some require calculations with other parameters before the desired value can be displayed An example would be the display of ground relative wind In this case the wind measured by the weather station needs to be combined with the vessel heading course over ground and speed over ground The instance number of the weather station is specified for each control This table provides the instance numbers of the other parameters used in the calculations Display Settings Advanced Configuration Primary Device Selection CT Any GPS Any Heading Any Inside Humidity Any Inside Temp Any Navigation Any Outside Humidity Any Outside Temp Any Speed Through Water Any Time Any Figure 15 DSM250 Primary Device Selection 5 2 4 1 3 Refresh Network Information The Device Configuration 5 2 3 1 and Device Selection 5 2 3 2 menus display a list of devices that have been detected on the NMEA2000 bus This list is kept in memory permanently to reduce the overhea
269. s a screen shot of the tank capacity being configured To program the tank capacity use the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys to move the highlighted cursor over the Tank Capacity menu item Then press the Enter key to move the highlight over the numerical tank capacity value Use the Increase and Decrease keys to Revision 1 4 16a Page 177 DSM250 User s Manual change the value to the desired tank capacity value and finally press the Accept key to confirm your selection Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HWE SM 3 Maretron TLM 400 Ar 1 10 114 Advanced Configuration Label Port Mid Tank Capacity ONERCEIIEIE Tank Levels Calibration Tank Number 2 Tank Type Fuel Cancel Increase Decrease Accept Figure 202 Configuring the Tank Capacity After you have pressed the Accept key a confirmation screen will appear that warns you that the fluid remaining measurement will change as a result of this change Press the Accept key to accept the change and store the new tank capacity value within the TLM100 or Press the Cancel Key to cancel the change and leave the old tank capacity programmed into the TLM100 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH de Changing tank capacity will affect Ta tank level readings Are you sure Press lt Cancel gt to cancel change Press lt Accept gt to accept change Tz Power Cancel Accept Figure 203
270. s fully charged it uses three parameters The Fully Charged Voltage indicates the value voltage at which the battery is considered fully charged if the battery voltage remains above this value and the battery current remains below the Fully Charged Current for the amount of time defined by the Fully Charged Time parameter 6 5 3 8 Fully Charged Current In order for the DCM100 to determine when a battery is fully charged it uses three parameters The Fully Charged Voltage indicates the value voltage at which the battery is considered fully charged if the battery voltage remains above this value and the battery current remains below the Fully Charged Current for the amount of time defined by the Fully Charged Time parameter 6 5 3 9 Fully Charged Time In order for the DCM100 to determine when a battery is fully charged it uses three parameters The Fully Charged Voltage indicates the value voltage at which the battery is considered fully charged if the battery voltage remains above this value and the battery current remains below the Fully Charged Current for the amount of time defined by the Fully Charged Time parameter 6 5 3 10 Battery Temperature In order for the DCM100 to properly determine battery capacity and state of charge it must know the temperature of the battery If you are using a TR3K temperature sensor attached to the battery you should set this parameter to Sensor Otherwi
271. s in Figure 153 below To configure the operating mode use the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys to move the highlighted cursor over the Operating Mode menu item then press the Enter key to move the highlight over the operating mode value Use the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys to change the operating mode to the desired value and finally press the Entry key to confirm your selection and store the operating mode within the RAA100 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNe HW SW 62 Maretron RAA DO 139991 10 14 9 Advanced Configuration Label Stbd Rudder Angle Calibration Rudder Number 1 Dual rudder starboard Operating Mode UIATZMIORRIDEERCEITE Gauge Resistance to sender 139 E Gauge Resistance to sender 199 Scroll Scroll Up Down Figure 153 RAA100 Setting the Operating Mode Power Revision 1 4 16a Page 145 DSM250 User s Manual 6 19 6 Gauge Resistance to Sender If the desired operating mode is NMEA 2000 amp Analog Gauge the two gauge resistances must be programmed please refer to the RAA100 User s Manual for details on how to perform these measurements A screenshot of the to sender gauge resistance configuration is shown in Figure 154 below To program the to sender gauge resistance use the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys to move the highlighted cursor over the Gauge Resistance to Gender menu item Then pres
272. s menu item and then press the Enter key to store the calibration values within the TLA100 and complete the calibration process Revision 1 4 16a Page 171 DSM250 User s Manual Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HW SWz T0 Maretron TLA WO OT i 10 14 Tank Levels Calibration Custom Calibration Set to European Standard 10 180 ohm Power Figure 193 European Standard Sender Calibration 6 23 5 Tank Number Next the tank number must be configured A tank number can have a value between 0 and 15 Each tank of a particular type must have a tank number that is different from all other tanks of the same type For instance only one TLA100 on a fuel tank may have tank number equal to 0 A screenshot of tank number configuration is shown in Figure 194 below In order to configure the tank number use the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys to move the highlighted cursor to Tank Number then press the Enter key to move the cursor over to the tank number value Use the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys to select the desired tank number Finally press the Enter key to confirm your selection and store the new tank number within the TLA100 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNe HWe SW 3 Maretron TLA WO KIK 10 Li Advanced Configuration Label Aft Fuel Tank Capacity
273. s remain the same The DSM250 computes time to empty using total fuel remaining see above and the engine s fuel rate Remember conditions can rapidly change that may drastically effect time to empty For example if you are going out to sea with the wind and current behind you the time to empty may indicate that there is enough fuel to return home when in fact there isn t enough fuel to return Time to empty is only applicable if the conditions remain the same Total Fuel Capacity displays the total capacity of all fuel tanks The DSM250 can only compute total fuel capacity assuming all totalized tanks are transmitting their capacity Total Fuel Level displays the percentage of fuel remaining in all fuel tanks Total Fuel Consumption displays the total volume of fuel used per unit of distance traveled for example gallons per mile or liters per km using the specified GPS and specified engine instances within the favorite screen setup see Section 5 2 6 4 2 for details 4 2 12 GPS Course Over Ground displays the current Course over Ground either true or magnetic depending on the Heading setting found under the Units menu item Lat Lon displays the current latitude and longitude of the vessel Speed Over Ground displays the current speed over ground Status displays the current operating mode and status of the specified GPS receiver 4 2 13 Heading Magnetic True displays the current heading of the
274. s the Enter key to move the highlight over the numerical resistance value Use the Increase and Decrease keys to change the value to the measured resistance value and finally press the Enter key to confirm your selection and store the value within the RAA100 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HW SW 62 Maretron RAR OO 199991 10 14 9 Advanced Configuration Label Stbd Rudder Angle Calibration Rudder Number 1 Dual rudder starboard Operating Mode NMEA2000 amp Analog Gauge Gauge Resistance to sender EE Gauge Resistance to sender 199 Cancel Increase Decrease Accept Figure 154 RAA100 Setting the to Sender Gauge Resistance 6 19 7 Gauge Resistance to Sender If the desired operating mode is NMEA 2000 amp Analog Gauge the two gauge resistances must be programmed please refer to the RAA100 User s Manual for details on how to perform these measurements A screenshot of the to sender gauge resistance configuration is shown in Figure 155 below To program the to sender gauge resistance use the Scroll Up or Scroll Down p keys to move the highlighted cursor over the Gauge Resistance to Sender menu item Then press the Enter key to move the highlight over the numerical resistance value Use the Increase and Decrease keys to change the value to the measured resistance value and finally press the Enter key
275. se if no temperature sensor is available you can set this parameter to the estimated battery temperature between 25 C and 125 C 6 5 3 11 Time Remaining Floor The DCM100 calculates the time given the current being discharged from the battery before the battery becomes discharged By default the DCM100 considers a battery to be discharged when its state of charge reaches the Time Remaining Floor value which is by default set to 50 If you desire to use some other state of charge value for the Time Remaining Floor you may change this parameter to the desired value 6 5 3 12 Time Remaining Averaging Period If loads on the battery are switching on and off frequently the battery time remaining value calculated by the DCM100 can vary significantly You may change the time over which current readings are averaged by changing this parameter anywhere in the range of 1 second to 32 minutes 6 5 3 13 Zero Current Threshold The current sensor reading can drift slightly at zero current depending on temperature Over a long period of time this can cause the DCM100 to calculate that a battery is discharging slowly even though it is not The Zero Current Threshold parameter indicates a reading from the current sensor below which no current is considered to be flowing into or out of the battery Page 66 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 6 5 4 Instance This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the unit You usually
276. section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value 6 14 1 7 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable The GPS100 transmits several different messages which can be turned on or turned off by the DSM250 display Pressing the Enter key with NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable menu item selected causes the DSM250 to display the screen shown in Figure 117 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNe HWe SWe 21 Maretron bam 211 di 20 1 Advanced Configuration NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable System Time Magnetic Variation Speed Position Rapid Update COG and SOG Rapid Update GNSS Position Data GNSS DOPs Scroll Scroll Up Down Figure 117 GPS100 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen L Off Of Off Off r You can enable or disable specific transmissions by scrolling or through the different transmitted messages and pressing the Enter key on the message to be configured Select whether you want the message to be transmitted On or disabled Off using the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 14 1 8 Restore Factory Defaults The DSM250 is capable of restoring all programmable settings on a Maretron GPS100 to the factory default condition You can choose this setting by pressing the Enter key with the Restore Factory Defaults menu item selected which causes the screen shown in Figure 118 to be displayed This will cause the GPS100
277. sion 1 4 16a Page 249
278. splayed if a variation is available on the NMEA 20007 bus If the DSM250 is not showing heading or COG i e no needle on compass rose or dashes for digital displays it s probably a good indication that variation isn t available on the network The DSM250 can t calculate true heading given magnetic heading from a compass if variation isn t available Likewise the DSM250 can t calculate magnetic course given true course from a GPS if variation isn t available You can setup a favorite screen to display variation which will help you determine whether or not you have a product on the network broadcasting variation information Maretron s GPS s use the World Magnetic Model to broadcast variation 5 2 7 2 Depth This menu item allows you to select the units to be used for the display of all depth related information Units that may be selected are the following e Meters e Fathoms e Feet 5 2 3 Distance This menu item allows you to select the units to be used for the display of all distance related information Units that may be selected are the following e Nautical Miles e km e Statute Miles Revision 1 4 16a Page 41 DSM250 User s Manual 5 2 7 4 Boat Speed This menu item allows you to select the units to be used for the display of all boat speed related information Units that may be selected are the following Knots Miles Hour Km Hour Meters second 5 2 7 5 Wind Speed This menu item allows you to select th
279. t Outside Temperature ER Cancel Increase Decrease Accept Figure 232 Setting the Outside Temperature Use the Increase and Decrease buttons to select the correct temperature and the press the Enter button to store it Revision 1 4 16a Page 197 DSM250 User s Manual 7 Data Display Types 7 1 Anchor Watch Display The Anchor Watch Display is a graphical representation of an Anchor Alert See section 8 3 7 9 for details on how to set up the Anchor Alert Anchor Watch Figure 233 Anchor Watch Display Example The display is centered on the position at which the anchor is dropped this point is represented by the anchor symbol The control is always oriented North up with the boundary circle located at the Alert Set Point distance from the anchor position The position of the vessel is represented by the boat symbol This is oriented according to the heading of the boat Page 198 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 7 2 Compass Rose Display The compass rose display shows a heading bearing or course parameter on a compass rose display There are two types of compass roses 1 Course Up where the needle is always pointing straight up and the compass rose rotates to indicate the heading pointed to by the needle Figure 234 and 2 North Up where the rose always has North straight up and the needle rotates pointing in the direction of the heading bearing or course parameter Figure 235 Figure 235 Compass R
280. t GPS position and the reference position must rise above the Inside Radius Alert Clear value for longer than the time in this field in order for an alert to become inactive Latitude The latitude of the reference position This may be typed in as lt degrees gt lt minutes gt followed by an N or S If the N or S is missing North is assumed Moving the cursor to another field will reformat the contents of this field Longitude The longitude of the reference position This may be typed in as lt degrees gt lt minutes gt followed by an E or W If the E or W is missing East is assumed Moving the cursor to another field will reformat the contents of this field Get Current Position Selecting this line will transfer the current GPS position into the Latitude and Longitude fields 8 3 7 9 Trigger Type is Anchor Alert The Anchor Alert is a special case of the Outside Radius Alert section 8 3 7 7 It is used to signal an alert whenever the vessel moves outside a programmable distance in any direction away from a reference point expressed as a longitude and latitude This alert is useful when the vessel is anchored or moored and the vessel should not drift outside a perimeter and if it does an alert is activated The point of reference can be selected from the current position or it can be manually entered Page 226 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron The Outside Radius Alert and the Anchor Alert are very similar The Anchor Alert is desi
281. t exceed 17 using the provided mounting studs thicker surfaces can be accommodated but you will need to purchase longer studs 2 Cut out an opening as indicated on the Flush Mount Template a Sorry we should have made the flange larger but be very careful not to go outside the indicated cutout area Be on the safe side and cut the hole a little small and rasp or file to fit Revision 1 4 16a Page 3 DSM250 User s Manual 3 Remove the template from the mounting surface 4 Insert the 2 studs into the back of the DSM250 a Make sure the studs are fully inserted into the back of the DSM250 but don t over tighten the studs b Do not use threadlocking compounds containing methacrylate ester such as Loctite Red 271 as they will cause stress cracking of the plastic enclosure 5 Remove the back of the case from the DSM250 a Place your thumbs on top of the studs and your finger along the side of the case and squeeze the back cover off the DSM250 6 Insert the back of the DSM250 through the front side of the cutout 7 Place the back cover on the opposite side of the mounting surface with the mounting holes aligned with the mounting studs and secure with the supplied hardware a Place the flat washer on the stud first followed by the lock washer followed by the knurled nut b Hand tighten the knurled nut Figure 2 Flush Mounting the DSM250 2 3 39 Gimbal Mounting the DSM250 The DSM250 can be gimbal mou
282. t was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value 6 22 1 3 NMEA0183 Settings Several characteristics of the NMEA 0183 interface of the SSC200 may be programmed using the DSM250 display This can be used for initial programming of a SSC200 compass even if only the NMEA 0183 interface is to be used after installation is complete Figure 166 below shows the possible programming options for the NMEA 0183 interface Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SH HWE SW D Maretron Dat AN 10707 0 20 11 Advanced Configuration NMEA0183 Settings EU atm 4500 bps Sentence Rate Selection Load Default Sentence Rate Selection Figure 166 SSC200 NMEA 0183 Settings Screen 6 22 1 3 1Baud Rate The SSC200 compass supports NMEA0183 communication at both 4800 baud and 38400 baud All SSC200 Compasses are shipped with a baud rate of 4800 baud This value may be changed by selecting the Baud Rate option in the menu and pressing Enter The use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons to select the desired baud rate and press Enter to save the value 6 22 1 3 2Sentence Rate Selection The NMEA 0183 interface is a very low bandwidth interface The SSC200 is capable of transmitting a wide variety of NMEA 0183 sentences and can exceed the bandwidth of the NMEA 0183 interface if all sentences are transmit
283. tallation description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later 6 18 1 3 Restore Factory Defaults This option restores all settings on the device to their factory default state 6 19 Maretron RAA100 Configuration This describes the configuration of the Maretron RAA100 firmware version 1 4 9 Maretron RAA100 rudder angle adapters on the network may be configured using the DSM250 The RAA100 configuration menu is shown in Figure 142 below Page 138 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNF HWe SW 62 Maretron RAR WO T991 10 14 9 Advanced Configuration abel Stbd Rudder Angle Calibration Rudder Number 1 Dual rudder starboard Operating Mode NMEA2000 Gauge Resistance to sender 135 Gauge Resistance to sender 199 Scroll Scroll Power U Down Figure 142 RAA100 Configuration Screen 6 19 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNe HWe Swe 62 Maretron RAA 90 T5991 10 14 9 Advanced Confi
284. ted at maximum rates causing lost data in NMEA 0183 multiplexers or on the SSC200 interface itself It is important therefore to limit the types of NMEA 0183 sentences transmitted only to those that are necessary for other products which are connected to the NMEA 0183 interface Figure 167 below shows the SSC200 NMEA 0183 Settings gt Sentence Rate Selection menu In this menu you can selectively enable and disable the different NMEA 0183 sentences that the SSC200 can transmit and you can program the transmission interval for the enabled sentences In the figure you can see that the HDG and ROT sentences will be transmitted every 0 1 second 10 times second the ATT sentence will be transmitted once per second and the HDM and HDT sentences are disabled Revision 1 4 16a Page 155 DSM250 User s Manual The last line in the menu enables you to program the lifetime of the variation data received by the SSC200 In Figure 167 you can see that the Variation Time has been programmed to 5 0 seconds This means that if the compass has not received magnetic variation for five seconds it will no longer transmit true heading data as the variation data it has received is now expired On the NUEA2000 side the Heading PGN has separate fields for heading sensor reading and variation The SSC200 always has magnetic heading available when variation is not available timeout or invalid the variation field is set to N A The default value of 5 0 secon
285. ter temperature sender present e YANMAR e YANMAR VDO Select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 11 13 Water Temperature Sender Offset Often the characteristics of individual water temperature senders vary from their specified values This setting allows you to apply an offset to the resistance value of the water temperature sender in order to allow you to bring the digital value reported by the EMS100 into agreement with that displayed by the analog gauge Valid options are e 100 100 number of ohms of resistance to add to the sender reading select the required option using the Increase and Decrease keys followed by the Enter key 6 11 14 Preset Engine Hours The EMS100 reports engine hours based on how long the EMS100 has been powered from the engine The EMS100 comes from the factory preprogrammed with an engine hours reading of 0 hours If you are installing the EMS100 on an engine that has been in service or if you have overhauled an engine you can use this setting to preset the engine hours reading to the desired value Valid options are e Q 99999 hours select the required option using the Increase and Decrease keys followed by the Enter key Page 94 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 6 11 15 Tachometer Flywheel Teeth The EMS100 needs to know the number of flywheel teeth on the engine or the number of alternator pulses per revolution in order to correctly cal
286. tered then the alert will never re trigger Alert Set Point If the value of the parameter being monitored falls below the value in this field the alert will become active Alert Set Delay The parameter being monitored must fall below the Low Alert Set Point value for longer than the time in this field in order for an alert to become active This can be used to prevent false alerts caused by parameter values that briefly have a value that would cause an alert but quickly return to the normal value range The value is entered as minutes seconds If only one number is entered it will be interpreted as seconds Alert Clear Point If the alert is active and the parameter value rises above the value in this field the alert will become inactive Alert Clear Delay The parameter being monitored must rise above the Low Alert Clear Point value for longer than the time in this field in order for the alert to become inactive The value is entered as minutes seconds If only one number is entered it will be interpreted as seconds In this example the set point may be described in more than one unit so additional fields have been supplied so that the user can select the units of depth Changing the units of the set point will also change the units of the clear point The initial units displayed in these fields will correspond to those set in the Units Dialog see section 5 2 7 8 3 7 3 Trigger Type is Data Unavailable Alert The Data Unavail
287. the transmission forward neutral or reverse Oil Pressure displays the pressure of the oil in the transmission Oil Temp displays the temperature of the oil in the transmission 4 2 25 VDR The DSM250 supports display of status of a Vessel Data Recorder Status displays the operating state of the VDR Memory Capacity displays the total memory capacity of the USB flash drive in the VDR Memory Used displays the total amount of memory used on the USB flash drive in the VDR Memory Available displays the total amount of memory remaining on the USB flash drive in the VDR Percent Used displays the percentage of the memory capacity of the USB flash drive in the VDR that is filled with data Percent Available displays the percentage of the memory capacity of the USB flash drive in the VDR that is still available for data storage 4 2 26 Vessel Keel displays the height of a swing keel Pitch displays the pitch of the vessel rotation about the horizontal axis perpendicular to the ship s keel Roll displays the roll of the vessel rotation about the horizontal axis parallel to the ship s keel Trim Tabs displays the position of the vessel s trim tabs Trim Tab Port displays the position of the port trim tab Trim Tab Starboard displays the position of the starboard trim tab 4 2 27 Wind Apparent Direction displays the angle of the wind relative to the vessel center line as it appears to an observer on th
288. then instead of reconnecting the current transformer you may change the value of this parameter from the default value of Normal Install to Inverse Install to correct for this Valid options are e Inverse Install e Normal Install Revision 1 4 16a Page 55 DSM250 User s Manual Use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons to select the correct option and then press Enter to save the value 6 3 1 7 Damping Period Power If you feel that the monitored Power parameters are changing too quickly or too slowly on the display you can adjust the damping that is applied to the output readings by adjusting this parameter The default damping period is 5 seconds You may change it to a value in the range of 0 2 seconds to 10 seconds Use the Increase and Decrease buttons to select the correct option and then press Enter to save the value 6 3 1 8 Damping Period V I F If you feel that the monitored Voltage Current and Frequency parameters are changing too quickly or too slowly on the display you can adjust the damping that is applied to the output readings by adjusting this parameter The default damping period is 0 5 seconds You may change it to a value in the range of 0 2 seconds to 10 seconds Use the Increase and Decrease buttons to select the correct option and then press Enter to save the value 6 3 1 9 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You
289. ther an alarm or warning condition requiring user intervention Alerts are integrated in an NMEA2000 system For each Alert one device acts as a master or Alert Source and monitors a parameter against a preset threshold When the parameter crosses this threshold the Alert is displayed on the Alert Source and an Alert Message is sent out on the NMEA2000 bus to other devices capable of displaying Alerts Optionally an Annunciator message is sent to devices capable of sounding an audio alarm e g the ALM100 Currently the DSM250 and the N2KView Vessel Monitoring Software are capable of generating and receiving Alert Messages The Alert may be accepted or cancelled from any capable device in which case an Alert Response Message is sent to the Alert Source which in turn will turn the Annunciators off and inform the devices on the bus of the new Alert Status 4 3 1 Alert Types There are two classes of alerts which are distinguished by their severity e Alarm An alarm is a type of alert announcing a condition requiring immediate attention or user intervention Alarms are shown in red when Active and always appear above the warnings on the Alert Status Screen e Warning A warning is a type of alert announcing a condition requiring non immediate attention for precautionary reasons Warnings are shown in yellow when Active and always appear below alarms on the Alert Status Screen 4 3 2 Alert Terminology The following alert te
290. tion Figure 76 DST100 Advanced Configuration Screen 6 9 1 1 Device Instance This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the unit You usually will not need to modify the default value of 0 unless you have multiple units on the network Page 82 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 6 9 1 2 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value 6 9 2 Clear Speed Calibration The Clear Speed Calibration configuration parameter shows you the currently used correction factor All STW readings for the particular DST100 indicated by the SN are multiplied by this number to arrive at the displayed number You can remove the correction factor by pressing the Enter key with the Clear Speed Calibration menu item selected And then choose Clear using Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key This changes the correction factor back to 1 such that all subsequent STW readings are no longer adjusted before displaying by the DSM250 6 9 3 Speed Calibration The DST100 speed through water STW initial accuracy is significantly affected by the loc
291. tion NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Restore Factory Defaults Figure 51 DCM100 Advanced Configuration Screen 6 5 1 1 Current Sensor Type Three different current sensors may be attached to the DCM100 Options are 200A A 200 Amp Current Transducer is connected to the DCM100 This has the part number LEMHTA200 S 400A A 400 Amp Current Transducer is connected to the DCM100 This has the part number LEMHTA400 S Page 62 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron e 600A A 600 Amp Current Transducer is connected to the DCM100 This has the part number LEMHTA600 S Select the required transducer using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 5 1 2 Device Instance This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the unit You usually will not need to modify the default value of 0 unless you have multiple units on the network 6 5 1 3 Installation Description This entry allows you to modify the NMEA 2000 installation description text strings You can enter any information you like here such as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value 6 5 1 4 NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable The DCM100 Annunciator Module transmits the NUEA2000 PGNs 127506 and 127508 which can be turned on or turned off by the DSM250
292. tion data Power Abort Increase Decrease Accept Figure 150 RAA1 00 Port Rudder Angle Calibration Once you have accepted the port rudder angle value a confirmation screen appears indicating that the rudder angle calibration has been successfully completed Figure 151 below shows a screenshot of this confirmation screen Revision 1 4 16a Page 143 DSM250 User s Manual Rudder Angles Calibration Three seperate calibration points are used to calibrate Rudder Angles Calibration Completed Successfully Press any key to continue d P a mme revert to old calibration data Power Abort Increase Decrease Accept Figure 151 RAA100 Custom Rudder Calibration Confirmation Screen 6 19 3 2 Set to American Standard 240 33 ohm Use the option for rudders using a rudder angle sender with the standard American resistance range 240 ohms at full port 45 33 ohms at full starboard 45 6 19 3 3 Set to European Standard 0 180 ohm Use this option for rudders using a rudder angle sender with the standard European resistance range 0 ohms at full port 45 180 ohms at full starboard 45 6 19 4 Rudder Number First the rudder number must be configured For a vessel with a single rudder the number should be set to U For a vessel with two rudders the port rudder should be set to 0 and the starboard rudder should be set to 1 Each rudder must have a rudder number that is different from al
293. tive state and annunciators will begin sounding again for that alert If a value of 0 00 is entered then the alert will never re trigger Offset Set Point Offset Set Delay If the direction being monitored differs from the reference direction by more than the Offset Heading Set Point for longer than the time specified in the Set Delay field the alert will become active Offset Clear Point Offset Clear Delay If the alert is active and the direction being monitored differs from the reference direction by less than the Offset Heading Clear Point for longer than the time specified in the Clear Delay field the alert will become inactive Reference Heading Reference Direction Reference Course Enter the desired reference heading or direction into this field If the monitored value differs from this value by more than the Offset Heading Set Point the alert will be triggered Get Current Heading Get Current Direction Get Current Course Pressing or clicking on this button will transfer the current value of the heading or direction being monitored into the Reference Heading Reference Direction Field 8 3 7 12 Trigger Type is Time Alert The DSM250 can be configured with alerts that go active at a predetermined time such as an alarm clock These alerts can also be configured to become active periodically making them useful for signaling watch changes for example every four hours or as a personnel alarm making sure a crew m
294. to Sender If the desired operating mode is NMEA 2000 amp Analog Gauge the two gauge resistances must be programmed please refer to the TLA100 User s Manual for details on how to perform these measurements A screenshot of the to sender gauge resistance configuration is shown in Figure 197 below To program the to sender gauge resistance use the Scroll Up or Scroll Down keys to move the highlighted cursor over the Gauge Resistance to Sender menu item Then press the Enter key to move the highlight over the numerical resistance value Use the Increase and Decrease keys to change the value to the measured resistance value and finally press the Enter key to confirm your selection and store the value within the TLA100 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNF HWe Swe 3 Maretron TLA WO AT El 10 Li Advanced Configuration Label Aft Fuel Tank Capacity 1 0 Gallons Tank Levels Calibration Tank Number G Tank Type Fuel Operating Mode NMEA2000 amp Analog Gauge Gauge Resistance to sender FA Gauge Resistance to sender 364 Cancel Increase Decrease Accept Figure 197 Configuring the to Sender Gauge Resistance 6 23 9 Gauge Resistance to Sender If the desired operating mode is NMEA 2000 amp Analog Gauge the two gauge resistances must be programmed please refer to the TLA100 User s Manual for details on how to perfo
295. to improper installation operation maintenance or storage or to other than normal use or service THE FOREGOING WARRANTIES ARE EXPRESSLY IN LIEU OF AND EXCLUDES ALL OTHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Statements made by any person including representatives of Maretron which are inconsistent or in conflict with the terms of this Limited Warranty shall not be binding upon Maretron unless reduced to writing and approved by an officer of Maretron INNO CASE WILL MARETRON BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF USE LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR ANY OTHER LOSS INCURRED BECAUSE OF INTERRUPTION OF SERVICE INNO EVENT SHALL MARETRON S AGGREGATE LIABILITY EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT S INVOLVED MARETRON SHALL NOT BE SUBJECT TO ANY OTHER OBLIGATIONS OR LIABILITIES WHETHER ARISING OUT OF BREACH OF CONTRACT OR WARRANTY TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER THEORIES OF LAW WITH RESPECT TO PRODUCTS SOLD OR SERVICES RENDERED BY MARETRON OR ANY UNDERTAKINGS ACTS OR OMISSIONS RELATING THERETO Maretron does not warrant that the functions contained in any software programs or products will meet purchaser s requirements or that the operation of the software programs or products will be uninterrupted or error free Purchaser assumes responsibility for the selection of the software progra
296. to set all programmable settings to the factory default condition Page 120 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SM HWe Swe 21 Maretron GPS 0 211 2i 20 1 Advanced Configuration Device Instance 211 GPS Antenna Altitude 0 00 m GPS Elevation Mask 7 5 GPS PDOP Mask Disable GPS SNR Mask 28 00 dB Installation Description NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable Restore Factory Defaults scroll scroll Up Power Down Figure 118 Restoring Factory Defaults on the GPS100 6 14 2 Cold Start GPS The DSM250 is capable of restarting the GPS algorithm on a Maretron GPS100 You can choose this setting by pressing the Enter key with the Cold start GPS Engine menu item selected which causes the screen shown in Figure 119 to be displayed This will cause the GPS100 to discard all position and satellite data and compute a position fix Configuration Device Configuration Na Manufacturer Model SHN HWE Swe 21 Maretron GPS RO 211 EN 2 0 1 Advanced Configuration Cold start GPS Engine sPS Mode Auto Label GPS211 JP15 SHIELD SBAS WAAS EGNOS MSAS Enable Power Enter Down Scroll Scroll Up Figure 119 Performing a Cold Start of the GPS100 6 14 3 GPS Mode Setting The DSM250 is capable of setting the minimum operating mode on a Maretron GPS100 You can choose this setting by pressing the Enter key with the GPS Mode menu item selected which c
297. ton 47 62 DEVICE INSTANCE EE 48 SN D ANSlAIGUON DSSCHIDTON EEN 48 6 1 4 NMEA2000 PGN Enableilusable 48 CFS Lle opeed CaO FA ON EE 48 AN D SPECT lee Le EEN 49 SE Cleat Fetter EEN 49 StS Temperature EIERE 50 6 1 9 Transducer Depth COftese cc cccccceccseeceeeeeeseeeeeesseceeeeeeseeteeeeeesneseeeseeeeeeeeeneeteeegeees 50 SC ew L le 8 E ie E 51 6 2 Bennett EP 30 NMEA1 Trim Tabs Configuration ccccccccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeaes 52 6 2 1 TiM Tabs lee Le DEE 52 DA Maretron ACM100 Confguraton na E E TETE ETE 54 631 Advanced Be ue Ten EE 54 Doaa AC OCU Ke 57 Ooo AG DEVICE Ke 57 694 Device MNANE aaa A A A E 57 G20 LADS EE 57 6 3 6 Reset Total Energy ReECordeg ccccccceccecccecceeceeeceecaeecueceecaeeceesaeeceeseesaeesensaeesenes 58 6 4 Maretron ALM100 Configuration cccccccccceccsecceeece cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeseeeseeeseeeeeeseeseeeseeeaes 59 041 Advanced Rea e IR e EE 59 SE EE rn Elte DU 043 EE EE 60 G44 PESEANMUNCIQION eege ee eee eee 61 Page iv Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 6 5 Maretron DCM100 Configuration cccecccccceeccececececeeeseeeeeeeeeeceeeseeeseeesueeseeseeeseeeseeeaes 62 6 5 1 Advanced CGontfguraton 62 6 5 2 Current Sensor Zero Offset Calbraton 64 Se E ee Ree 65 SE E ue 67 SE E Ee 67 6 6 Maretron DCR100 CGontguraton 68 SE Ad ned COMMUN Al OM EE 68 SERA e 70 TO N AICE ee ono ei ae a E EE 70 6 6 4 Channel gt 20pConfguraton 70 6 7 Maretron DSM200 Contg
298. too large to fit on a single screen so it is shown in two separate screenshots below Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HWt SM 69 Maretron FFH 400 DIER 10 1121 Channel 1 ITT 3 Phase Engine Instance ei Engine Label STED ENG K Factor 1001 Data Damping Period 3 05 Reset Total Volume Recorded Temperature Instance 2 Temperature Source User Defined 129 Figure 96 FFM100 Channel 1 First Configuration Screen Two Independent Sensors Mode Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SN HWt SWE 69 WMaretron FFH 400 DIER 10 1121 Channel 1 Temperature Instance 2 Temperature Source User Defined 129 Temperature Label STBD FUEL TEMP Fluid Type Fuel Flow Instance 1 Flow Label STED ENG FUEL FLOW Volume Instance 1 PO TIER STED ENG FUEL VOLUME Figure 97 FFM100 Channel 1 Second Configuration Screen Two Independent Sensors Mode 6 12 5 2 1Sensor You may select whether this channel is connected to a 3 phase sensor Maretron fuel flow sensors with three pulse outputs or a 1 phase sensor other manufacturer s fluid flow sensors with a single pulse output 6 12 5 2 2Engine Instance Program this parameter to match the desired engine instance number of the flow rate and total fuel used for this channel You can program this parameter to any value between 0 and 252 Revision 1 4 16a Page 105 DSM250 User s Manual 6 1
299. tore it within the RAA100 Figure 149 shows a screenshot of the center rudder calibration screen You may also press the Abort Key to end the calibration process Rudder Angles Calibration Three seperate calibration points are used to calibrate the rudder hard over starboard center hard over port 11 Center the rudder 2 Press lt Accept gt to set rudder angle at center position 13 Press lt Abort gt to cancel calibration and revert to old calibration data Power Figure 149 RAA 100 Center Rudder Angle Calibration The third step in the custom rudder angle sender calibration process is to turn the wheel hard over to port and to measure the angle or the rudder angle from center with a protractor or other instrument Use the Increase and Decrease keys until the highlighted rudder angle value is at the measured value and then press Enter to accept the value and store it within the RAA100 Figure 148 shows a screenshot of the starboard rudder calibration screen You may also press the Abort Key to end the calibration process Rudder Angles Calibration Three seperate calibration points are used to calibrate the rudder hard over starboard center hard over port 11 Turn wheel hard over to port 12 Use arrow keys to select rudder angle 13 Press lt Accept gt to set rudder angle at hard over port position 14 Press lt Abort gt to cancel calibration and revert to old calibra
300. tores all settings on the device to their factory default state 6 29 1 4 Label A device label may be assigned to the VDR100 as an aid to identifying the device over the network See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value 6 30 Maretron WSO100 Configuration The DSM250 is capable of performing configuration of the WSO100 Wind Weather Sensor This describes the configuration of the Maretron WSO100 firmware version 2 0 12 Figure 221 below shows a screenshot of the WSO100 configuration menu Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SHN HWE SW 8A Maretron WSOR0 T0021 20 20 Advanced emganna installation Offset Calibration Wind Data Damping Period 4 0s Barometric Pressure 29 80 Inches Mercury Outside Humidity 13 Percent Outside Temperature 82 F Scroll Scroll Power Up Down Figure 221 WSO100 Configuration Screen 6 30 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within the device and should only be performed by an advanced user Typically advanced configuration is only done at installation and should not need to be done while at sea Page 190 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNe HWe Swe 8A Maretron W500 TAH 20 20 2 Advanced Configuration Device Instance 1 Instance Humidity 0 Instance Pressure Si Instance Temperature 0 Installation Description NMEA2000 PG
301. transmission and reset the unit back to its factory defaults Maretron GPS Antenna Receiver GPS200 enable and disable WAAS functionality force a cold start enable disable individual PGN transmission and reset the unit back to its factory defaults Maretron Internet Protocol Gateway IPG100 set IP connection parameters set N2KServer password view N2KServer information and reset the unit back to its factory defaults Maretron J1939 to NMEA 2000 Gateway J2K100 set J1939 node address set NMEA 2000 engine transmission instance enable pass through of J1939 diagnostic messages and enable disable individual NMEA 2000 PGN transmissions Maretron Network Bus Extender NBE100 Set device label Maretron Rudder Angle Adapter RAA100 Set rudder number operating mode and calibrate rudder position Page 44 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Maretron Run Indicator Monitor RIM100 Set Data Instance for the device and labels for the device and each channel Maretron Switch Indicator Monitor SIM100 Set Data Instance for the device and labels for the device and each channel Set each channel mode Maretron Solid Sate Compass SSC200 set installation offset perform magnetic deviation calibration check magnetic deviation calibration status invert installation configure magnetic variation settings setup NMEA0183 interface program rate of turn damping zero the rate of turn offset and enable disable individua
302. u are monitoring shore power e Bus use this value if you are monitoring power flowing across a cable that is not located directly at the output of a generator or a shore power connection e g an AC selection switch might have as an input the shore power and another input from the generator connecting the ACM100 at the output of the AC selection switch would require the ACM100 to be configured as Bus 6 3 4 Device Instance This entry allows you to program the NMEA 2000 device instance for the unit You usually will not need to modify the default value of O unless you have multiple ACM100s on the network 6 3 5 Label A device label may be assigned to the ACM100 as an aid to identifying the device over the network e Shore Power or Port Generator etc Typically this label will describe the equipment to which the ACM100 is connected See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value Revision 1 4 16a Page 57 DSM250 User s Manual 6 3 6 Reset Total Energy Recorded The ACM100 will accumulate the total amount of energy produced by a Generator or a Utility Pressing the Enter key while this item is highlighted will start the process to reset this value to zero The following confirmation screen is displayed Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SHY Are you sure you want to reset energy recoed Power Cancel Accept Figure 46 Reset Total Energy Recorded Confirmation Sc
303. uch as the date the unit was installed or the location in which it was installed for later reference Tools such as Maretron N2KAnalyzer allow you to view these values later 6 28 1 3 Restore Factory Defaults This option restores all settings on the device to their factory default state 6 28 2 Remote Device Selection The Maretron NMEA 2000 to NMEA 0183 gateway USB100 can be configured to select which NMEA 2000 devices are selected for display on the computer attached to the USB interface of the USB100 In this manner multiple devices of the same type may be used on a NMEA 2000 network in a fail safe configuration The USB100 Device Selection Menu for an example network configuration can be seen in Figure 218 WARNING Do not select multiple devices of the same type for display This will result in multiple and possibly conflicting readings Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer 56 Maretron Remote Device Selection Na Manuf Maretron Maretron Maretron 4 Maretron Power Maretron Mlaretron Model USE WO Model TLM WO DSM250 DCW Sg DCH SR SSL AN DSM250 GPS WO Scroll Up ole Thi SN 1500087 GU Scroll Down HW SWe 10 18 2 Stat Disp Onl On Onl On OnL On Figure 218 USB100 Device Selection Screen The NA column of the menu displays the node address the device is using The Manuf column of the menu displays the manuf
304. ule transmits a number of the NMEA2000 PGNs which can be turned on or turned off by the DSM250 display Pressing the Enter key with NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable menu item selected causes the DSM250 to display the following screen Figure 100 Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model Sg HW SWe 58 Maretron FPL SN Ha 10 10 1 Advanced Configuration NMEA2000 PGN Enable Disable HfM Fluid Level Lt HGH Actual Pressure On Figure 100 FPM100 NMEA 2000 PGN Enable Disable Screen Page 108 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron You can enable or disable the transmission of a PGN message or set the frequency of transmission of the message by pressing the Enter key on the message to be configured Options are Off The PGN will not be transmitted On The PGN will be transmitted at its default NMEA2000 rate 0 5s 5s The PGN will be transmitted at the interval specified Select the required option using the Scroll Up and Scroll Down keys followed by the Enter key 6 13 1 4 Restore Factory Defaults This option restores all settings on the device to their factory default state 6 13 2 Channel 0 5 This submenu contains configuration parameters for each of the six channels These menus look different depending on whether the channel s Function has been set to Tank or Pressure Vacuum 6 13 2 1 Channel 0 5 Tank This section describes the channel configuration menu when the chan
305. ume recorded to zero 6 12 4 1 7 Temperature Instance Program this parameter to match the desired instance number of the temperature reading for this channel You can program this parameter to any value between 0 and 252 The default value for this parameter is 0 6 12 4 1 8 Temperature Source Program this parameter to match the desired source type of the temperature reading for this channel The default value for this parameter is 129 User Defined 6 12 4 1 9 Temperature Label Program this parameter with a text string which identifies the particular temperature parameter being monitored by this channel Maretron display products will display this label text when you are selecting data to display 6 12 4 1 10 Flow Instance Program this parameter to match the desired instance number of the fluid flow reading for this channel You can program this parameter to any value between 0 and 252 The default value for this parameter is 0 6 12 4 1 11 Flow Label Program this parameter with a text string which identifies the particular fluid flow parameter being monitored by this channel Maretron display products will display this label text when you are selecting data to display Page 100 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 6 12 4 1 12 Volume Instance Program this parameter to match the desired instance number of the volume reading for this channel You can program this parameter to any value between 0 and 252 The default value for this parameter
306. uraton 72 6 7 1 Remote eelere HERE gehier dee eeh Ae det a aE E E 73 6 8 Maretron DSM150 DSM250 Confguraton 15 6 8 1 Remote Device SEICCHOM EE 15 6 8 2 Copy alarms settings from local display 76 6 8 3 Copy device selection from local display ccccccccccecceeeceeeceeeseeeseeeaeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeaes Tf 6 8 4 Copy display settings from local display cccccccccccecceecceeece cece eeseeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeaes 78 6 8 5 Copy favorite settings from local GISPIAY cece cecceecceeeceeeceeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeaes 78 6 8 6 Copy DST100 calibrations from local denl y cc cccccccecceeeceeeeeeeceeeseeeseeeeeeeseeaes 79 6 8 7 Copy all settings from local display ccc ccccccccecceeeeeeeceeeseeeceeeseeeseeseeeeeeeseeeseeseeeaes 19 LAS EE 80 6 8 9 Remote Biol ecee gt cle 6 i 81 6 9 Maretron DST TOO CONNU ATION EE 82 09r Advan cd Ee Me Ee EE 82 6 9 2 Clear Speed CGalbraton Ea aai 83 DF SCC ANN ANON EE 83 SE Mu Gelle geen E 84 SSES am ele A D e WEE 84 6 10 Maretron DST110 Configuration EE 86 SEN L Da WE Advanced COMMUN Bel OMe cpcte set cssetesiel gate deste ated cain ase guna sire eee deaedistrcdmaedineteeciometienedienedies 86 6 10 2 Clear Speed CGalbraton cc ccccccecceccsecseeceeeeeecseeeeesseeeceueceeeeeesgeseeeeeteeeeeseeteeeeess 87 610 3 Speed lee sicccsctasasnicansaarcaansnseersacaceseaesdaxissaieyassasnaveseragaraxesasayaseranareaGraaesatesancian 88 6 10 4 Clear Temperature Offset 88 6
307. ure for an engine Hydraulic Oil displays hydraulic oil pressure Steam displays steam pressure Transmission Oil displays oil pressure for an transmission User Defined 129 User Defined 144 displays pressure from a pressure sensor of a user defined type Water displays water pressure Page 18 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 4 2 19 Special Devices Watermaker displays a screen with several different parameters associated with Sea Recovery watermakers 4 2 20 Speed Speed Through Water displays the speed of the boat relative to the water Speed Over Ground displays Speed over Ground relative to the earth not the water Total Log displays the total distance traveled by the vessel since the log indicator was installed Trip Log displays the distance traveled by the vessel since the trip indication of the log indicator was last reset 4 2 21 Tank The DSM250 supports the display of information for up to sixteen tanks types 16 fuel plus 16 water etc Capacity displays the fluid capacity of the tank Level displays the level of fluid in the tank as a percentage of its capacity Remaining displays the amount of fluid in the tank 4 2 22 Temperature The DSM supports the display of temperatures Each temperature sender on the bus is required to state the source of the temperature which may be one of e Bait Well Battery Dew Point Engine Coolant Engine Oil Engine Room Exhaust Gas Freezer
308. ure sensor when it is outputting a 20mA current 6 13 2 2 6Source In the NUEA2000 PGNs each pressure is associated with a source type Possible values are Water Pressure Atmospheric Pressure Compressed Air Pressure Hydraulic Pressure Steam Pressure User Defined Temperature 129 4 144 Use this when none of the above options are suitable 6 13 2 2 7Data Damping Period If the channel s Function is set to Tank the default data damping period is 16 0 seconds If the channel s Function is set to Pressure Vacuum the default data damping period is 3 0 seconds 6 14 Maretron GPS100 Configuration This describes the configuration of the Maretron GPS100 firmware version 1 0 6 Some versions of the GPS100 have a different set of firmware that is currently at version 1 6 14 The configuration of these devices is identical to version 2 0 1 shown here The GPS100 has several different programmable parameters that are configurable by the DSM250 display Normally it is not necessary to configure the GPS100 although there may be some circumstances where configuration is desirable The following sections describe the different configuration modes including the Restore Factory Defaults configuration which allows you to return the GPS100 to the factory settings Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNe HW SW 21 Maretron GPS WW 211 di 20 1 Advanced Configuration old start GPS Engine GPS Mode Auto Label
309. urn Zero Offset Calibration Variation Source NMEA0183 or NMEA2000 Scroll Scroll Power Up Down Figure 171 Setting the Installation Orientation Page 158 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron The choices that are offered are Normal Installation default Backward Installation Upside Down Installation or Upside Down and Backward 6 22 4 Label This menu item allows you to set a text label for the device This text label will help you to identify a particular device when you have more than one of the same type in the system and appears when selecting devices in both the DSM250 and in N2KView See section 3 3 4 for details on how to enter a textual value 6 22 5 Magnetic Deviation Calibration The DSM250 is capable of performing magnetic deviation calibration on a Maretron SSC200 solid state compass The Rate of Turn Offset Calibration section 6 22 8 should be done before the Deviation Calibration The first screen Figure 172 gives instructions for performing the procedure First begin to turn the boat in a slow circle either clockwise or counter clockwise at about 3 to 12 degrees per second Magnetic Deviation Calibration In Begin to turn boat in a slow circle 0 5 2 min circle or 3 12 le Current Rate of Turn 1 8 s 2 Press lt Begin gt to begin calibration or press lt No Acc gt to begin calibration with accelerometer disabled No Acc Begin Figure 172 SSC20
310. ut of operation Moored This mode is used when the vessel is secured to a structure that is permanently attached to the ground like a pier wharf dock or mooring buoy Underway This mode is used when the vessel is not moored nor anchored Anchored This mode is used when the vessel is secured to the sea floor with an anchor 4 3 5 Alert States Alerts exist in one of five states Disabled A Disabled Alert is an alarm or warning that has yet to be enabled or activated In this state no action will be taken regardless of the value of the monitored parameter A Disabled Alert May be enabled in which case it transitions to the Inactive state Inactive An Inactive alert is an alarm or warning that has been enabled but the condition causing the alert is not present If the alert condition becomes true the alert will become an Active Alert An Inactive alert may be disabled which causes it to transition to the Disabled state New alerts are created in the Inactive State Active An Active alert is an alarm or warning where the condition to trigger the alert has been met and is still present and the operator has not accepted the alert An active alert is indicated by a flashing indicator on the Alert Status Screen and by a flashing colored box at the top right of the DSM250 screen This box will be visible on all screens Also annunciators that are programmed to sound when this alert is active will be sounding during this stat
311. wide variety of weather related data See Section 7 8 for details Wind Chill displays the current wind chill based on air temperature and wind speed 4 2 10 Fluid Flow Flow Rate displays the current rate of flow of a fluid Trip Volume displays the total volume of fluid through the sensor on the present trip 4 2 11 Fuel Management WARNING Maretron fuel management products are designed to be accurate and reliable however they should be used only as aids for fuel management and not as a replacement for traditional fuel management techniques BEWARE Conditions can quickly change that drastically effect time and distance to empty You should not use the fuel management data types unless you fully understand all the parameters associated with fuel management All fuel tanks and all engines must be included when setting up the DSM250 plus there must be accurate fuel rate sensors installed on the vessel and accurate speed information in order for the DSM250 to properly display fuel management information You should also note that fuel levels may contain significant error if the boat is not sitting level in the water e sailboat heeled over or a power boat riding bow up won t necessarily report the correct amount of fuel Even when setup correctly the DSM250 should be used only as an aid and not the sole source for fuel management information Total Fuel Economy displays distance traveled per unit fuel used for example miles p
312. wn buttons to select Save and Exit and then press Enter Page 10 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron 4 Important Concepts 4 1 Favorite Screens The DSM250 can display many different types of information in many different configurations It is capable of displaying up to four distinct windows on its screen at one time Rather than making you select from among the many types of available information any time you want to change the displayed data the DSM250 has the concept of Favorite Screens A Favorite Screen is a combination of display settings data to display and formats in which to display the data The DSM250 supports up to 16 different favorite screens 4 2 Categories and Data Types The DSM250 is capable of displaying many types of information In order to make it easier to locate a specific type of information to display the different types of information are organized into general categories AC Bus AC Generator AC Utility Anchor Watch DC Depth Elec Distribution Engine Environment Fuel Management GPS Heading Humidity Indicator Navigation Pressure Vacuum Rudder Special Device Speed Indicator Tank Temperature Time Date Transmission Vessel Wind Revision 1 4 16a Page 11 DSM250 User s Manual The following sections explore each category in detail and spell out all of the data types that are available for display if the appropriate sensors are installed in the network 4 2 1 AC Bus Average Fr
313. yed Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model SNe HW SW 21 Maretron GPS 211 21 20 1 Advanced Configuration Cold start GPS Engine GPS Mode Auto Label GPS211 JP15 SHIELD SBAS WAAS EGNOS MSAS KAIO Scroll Scroll Up Down Page 122 Revision 1 4 16a Maretron Figure 121 Configuring SBAS on a GPS100 The allowable option for SBAS configuration are either Disable which causes the GPS100 not to use SBAS satellites or Enable which causes the GPS100 to use SBAS satellites for developing a position fix Revision 1 4 16a Page 123 DSM250 User s Manual 6 15 Maretron GPS200 Configuration This describes the configuration of the Maretron GPS200 firmware version 1 0 6 The GPS200 has several different programmable parameters that are configurable by the DSM250 display Normally it is not necessary to configure the GPS200 although there may be some circumstances where configuration is desirable The following sections describe the different configuration modes including the Restore Factory Defaults configuration which allows you to return the GPS200 to the factory settings Configuration Device Configuration NA Manufacturer Model Sg HW SWE di Maretron DS A9 PTS 10 a4 Cold start GPS Engine Label SBAS WAAS EGNOS MSAS Enable Figure 122 GPS200 Configuration Screen 6 15 1 Advanced Configuration Advanced Configuration changes some complex parameters within t

Cisco Systems SPA9000 IP Phone User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents